AR fx-CG50 fx-CG50 AU )ﻣﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ (3.10 fx-CG20ﹸ ) fx-CG20 AUﹸﻣﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ (3.10 )ﻣﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ (3.10 fx-CG10ﹸ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ 3.10 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ CASIO http://edu.casio.com ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ http://world.casio.
• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ. • ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ.
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ! ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 1-1 ............................................................................................................................ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 1-3 ............................................................................................................................. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ 1-7 ..............................................................
.11ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ 5-50 ....................................................................................................... .12ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ(5-52 .................................... .13ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ 5-54 ............................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 11-1 ....................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ 12-1 ........................................................................................................ .2ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ 12-1 .................................................................................................................
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻﹰ! 0 kﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ uﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-CG10ﻭ fx-CG20ﻭ fx-CG20 AU ﯾﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﯿﻞ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .fx-CG50ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-CG50ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-CG10ﻭ fx-CG20ﻭ .fx-CG20 AUﻭﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
uﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ • ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ .ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Kﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ } {LISTﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ.[OPTN]-[LIST] : • ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ) 6 (gﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ. uﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-52ﲤﻨﺢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .
kﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ. ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ 1 log l 2 10x !l 3 B al ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
.2ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ. uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ mﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (d, e, f, cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻼﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Table ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ. Recursion ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ .ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ. Conic Graphs ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ.
kﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ 6 ،1ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ. kﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ: ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .
kﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ :ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﻣﻦ 21ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ 8ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻣﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ 384ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ × 216ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻻ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ kﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ .ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﻲ. uﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ bcw b.
kﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ. uﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ 12 .................ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ: 23 456 uﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮ ...............ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0ABCDEF1(16) :ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ )180150001(10 uﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ .................ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ12° 34’ 56.78” : • ﻭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ. .
uﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ cos60ﺍﻟﻰ sin60 Acga ddd D s uﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ 369 × × 2ﺍﻟﻰ 369 × 2 Adgj**c dD ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ،ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Dﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ. uﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ 2.362ﺍﻟﻰ .sin2.362 Ac.dgx ddddddd s kﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳉﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ • ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ. ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ. kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ eﺍﻭ .d ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ eﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ .ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ dﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﺍﻭ cﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(.ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :2 Abcd+efgw cde-fghw A ) fﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ) fﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺘﻴﻦ( • ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ) ﺃﻭ ﻗﹼﺺ( ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ. ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ )ﺍﻟﻘﺺ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ .ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻱ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ. uﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ .1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!i (CLIP • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ. .
uﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺣﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!j(PASTE ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ. A )!j(PASTE kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ. • ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ. • ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ " "1:ALLﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ. uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ .
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "( ،"FMaxﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ )A!e(CATALOG)6(CAT )c1(EXE )cc1(EXE cccccc )1(INPUT ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ).!J(QUIT uﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣ ﹴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ. .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !e(CATALOGﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(CATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ. .3ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ " "1:ALLﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(EXEﺃﻭ .w • ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "("FMax )A!e(CATALOG)6(CAT )1(EXE)t(F)h(M )1(INPUT uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).5(HISTORY • ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(INPUTﺃﻭ .w uﻇﻴﻔﺔ QR Code • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ QR Codeﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﹸﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ .
.1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ) 2(QRﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(QR • ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ .QR Code .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﳌﺴﺢ QR Codeﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ. • ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ. • ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﯽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ،QR Codeﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﮐﻲ ﻭﻗﺎﺭﺉ QR Codeﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﻤﺎ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ،QR Codeﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ dﻭ eﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ "ﺑﺎﻳﺖ" ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ).4(MATH ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ,ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ,ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. • } ... {MAT/VCTﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ،MAT/VCTﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ /ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ • } ... {2×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 2 × 2 • } ... {3×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 3 × 3 • } ... {m×nﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ mﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ) nﺇﻟﻰ (6 × 6 • } ... {2×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 2 × 1 • } ... {3×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 3 × 1 • } ...
( 1+ 2 5 A(b+ ) 2 ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ :2 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ' cc f e )x w 1 1+ 0 x + 1dx ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ Ab+4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) v+b ea fb e w 1-18 :3 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :4 ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 2 1 2 1 2 2 ×2 )Ac*4(MATH)1(MAT/VCT)1(2×2 'bcc ee !x(')ce e!x(')cee'bcc w uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺳﻬﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
uﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ .ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ. uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ") "(2+3ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻝ ' ،ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ). (2+3 ﻣﺜﻼ: .1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ.
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ' ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ )ﺍﻷﺱ( M ' )'(!x ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ )'!((3 ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ )'!M(x ex )!I(ex 10x )!l(10x )log(a,b )4(MATH)2(logab ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ )4(MATH)3(Abs ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )4(MATH)4(d/dx ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ )4(MATH)5(d2/dx2 ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ )4(MATH)6(g )1(∫dx Σﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ )4(MATH)6(g ) (2(Σ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ : ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ e d kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ (wﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ. ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺇ ﹼﻣﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "."Frac Resultﻋﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-35 • ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ .
kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﲔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ. b+cw *cw ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻟﺔ. ﻣﺜﻼ: ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ " "1+2ﺍﻟﻰ " "1+3ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. • ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﺼﻞ 2ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ". uﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ 6 = 3 4 × 5 10 A6'4*5w )cos π = 1 (Angle: Rad 3 2 (π)'3e)w log28 = 3 A4(MATH)2(logab) 2e8w ) ( A!M(x') 7e123w 7 123 = 1.
kﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ /ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ /ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ .1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺍﺿﻐﻂ .!m(SET UP)1(Math)J .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(MATHﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .MATH .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(MAT/VCTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. • } … {2×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 2 × 2 • } … {3×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 3 × 3 ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ mﻭﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ) nﺍﻟﻰ (6 × 6 • } … {m×nﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﹰ • } ... {2×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 2 × 1 • } ... {3×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ 3 × 1 • } ...
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ×8 33 1 2 1 6 5 13 4 ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. beb'ceedde bd'eeefege *iw uﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻝ Mat J !c(Mat)!-(Ans)a !c(Mat)a)(J)w • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ( ،ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ 1 x 2− 1 x −1 dx 4 2 x ∫ 0 = yﺍﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Graph ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. )mGraphK2(CALC)3(∫dx b'eevx-b'ce v-beaevw )6(DRAW • ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
.5ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )(OPTN ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .K • ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Kﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
.6ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ )(VARS ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ. {V-WIN}/{FACTOR}/{STAT}/{GRAPH}/{DYNA}/{TABLE}/{RECURSION}/{EQUATION}/ }{FINANCE}/{Str • ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻭﺿﺎﻉ ،FINANCE ،EQUATIONﻓﻘﻂ ﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) 3ﻭ (4ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Program • ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ Jﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
• }} ... {PTSﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ{ • } ... {y3}/{x3}/{y2}/{x2}/{y1}/{x1ﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ • }} ... {INPUTﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ{ • }} ... {sp}/{sx2}/{sx1}/{x¯ 2}/{x¯ 1}/{n2}/{n1}/{sx}/{x¯ }/{nﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ{}/ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ{/ }ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ }/{1ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ }/{2ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ /{2 }ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{1ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{2ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ {p • }} ...
— TABLE uﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ • }} ... {Pitch}/{End}/{Startﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{ • }} ... {1*Resultﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{ * 1ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ Resultﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ TABLEﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻭﻭﺿﻊ .Program — RECURSION uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ*, 1ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ • }} ... {FORMULAﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ{ • }{an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/ ...
.7ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )(PRGM ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺃﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ Programﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) .!J(PRGMﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ).(PRGM • ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Mathﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Input/Outputﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. • }} .... {COMMANDﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{ • }} ..... {CONTROLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{ • }} .............{JUMPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ{ • }?{ } ...................ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ{ • }^{ } .
.8ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ .ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) m!(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ. • ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﹰ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ .ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ. .
) Func Type uﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ( ﲢﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ vﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﹼ • }=} ... {X=}/{Parm}/{r=}/{Yﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )}/{(Y= f (xﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ{/ }ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﻚ{}/ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ){(X= f (y • } {y>f(x)}/{y}/{Y<}/{Yt}/{Ysﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ • } {x>f(y)}/{x
) List File uﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ( • }} ... {FILEﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{ ) Sub Name uﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( • }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{ ) Graph Func uﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ( • }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{ ) Dual Screen uﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ( • }} ...
) Slope uﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺭﻭﻃﻲ( • }} ... {Off}/{Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{ ) Payment uﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ( • }} ... {END}/{BEGINﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ{}/ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ{ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ) Date Mode uﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ( • } ... {360}/{365ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ } {360}/{365ﻳﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻦ ) Periods/YR. uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ( • }} ... {Semi}/{Annualﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ{}/ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ{ Graph Color u • } ...
.9ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ. uﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ .1ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!h(CAPTURE • ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w • ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ " = n) "Capt nﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ(. • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
.10ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ... ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. kﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).5(RESET .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) ،1(SETUPﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(Yes .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jmﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺭﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
uﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(12-4 kﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺣﻔﻈﺎ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ .1ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ 2 kﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ -ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ. • ﲡﺮﻯ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑـ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ .ﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. • ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ. ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ 56 × (–12) ÷ (–2.5) = 268.8 ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ 56*-12/-2.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 100 ÷ 6 = 16.66666666... ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ 16.66666667 100/6w 4ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ !m(SET UP) ff 1(Fix)ewJw 5ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ !m(SET UP) ff 2(Sci)fwJw ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ *1 16.6667 *1×1001 1.6667 !m(SET UP) ff 3(Norm)Jw 16.66666667 * 1ﰎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400 ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ 200/7*14w 400 ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ 3 !m(SET UP) ff 1(Fix)dwJw 400.
kﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﳉﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: 1ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ A • ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )Pol (x, y), Rec (r, θ 2 3 4 5 6 7 • ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ )ﻛﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﻭ ،Σﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( d/dx, d2/dx2, ∫dx, Σ, Solve, SolveN, FMin, FMax, List→Mat, Fill, Seq, SortA, SortD, Min, Max, Median, Mean, Augment, Mat→List, DotP, CrossP, Angle, UnitV, Norm, P(, Q(, R(, t(, RndFix, logab • ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ*List,
)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = 2 + 3 × (log sin2π2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691 (Rad ﻣﺜﺎﻻ 1 2 3 4 5 6 • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ. })exln 120 → ex{ln( 120 ﻭ ﺇﻻ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ. • ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ. • ﻛﻞ ﺷﻴﺊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﻳﺤﻈﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ' ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ )´ (a´, c´, dﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ).(a, c, d ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: '3 + 11 2 ' 3 '2 10 ' + = 110 11 10 ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ '2 × (3 – 2 '5) = 6 – 4 5 ﺷﻜﻞ ' '35 ' 2 × 3 = 148.492424 (= 105 2)*1 ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ '150 2 = 8.
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ: ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ: 78π × 2 = 156π πﺷﻜﻞ 123456π × 9 = 3490636.164 (= 11111104 π)*3 ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ 568 71 π = 105 π 824 103 129 π *4 1619 2 πﺷﻜﻞ 105 258 π = 6.533503684 3238 ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ 2 * 3ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻷﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ | |106ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ. b * 4ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻷﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ .
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ) ( 13 4 ) ( sin 2 5 ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ → (2 × 1 ): 2 1 3 → 3 (sin 2 × 4 ): sin 2 4 5 5 kﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .
uﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ. ] wﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ[ ] aﻗﻴﻤﺔ[ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ 123ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ .A Abcdaav(A)w ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ 456ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﻭ ﳋﺰﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ .B Aav(A)+efga al(B)w • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ Xﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) a+(Xﺍﻭ .vﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) a+(Xﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،Xﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ .xﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟـ Xﻭ xﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 3 ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ 10ﻟـ xﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ 5ﻟـ .Xﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟـ .
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ " "ABCﺍﻟﻰ Str 1ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ Str 1ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ. !m(SET UP)2(Line)J )(”)v(A )A!a( A -LOCK )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ((”)a )l(B)I(C aJ6(g)5(Str)bw 5(Str)bw ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ. • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. uﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ][OPTN]-[FUNCMEM ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ .
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 1 )AK6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM 2(RECALL)bw • ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ. ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) wﻭﺍﻻ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﺧﻄﺄ( ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ. • ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ 15ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﺃﺳﲔ. • ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Aﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻔﺄ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
.3ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. kﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ][SET UP]- [Angle .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " "Angleﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J • }} ... {Gra}/{Rad}/{Degﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{ }/ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{ }/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ • ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )(Sci ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ 2(Sci)dw ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ) 0 = nﺍﻟﻰ (9ﲢﺪﻳﺪ 0ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ .10 • ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )(Norm 1/Norm 2 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(Normﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ Norm 1ﻭ .Norm 2 Norm 1: 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| >1010 Norm 2: 10–9 (0.
.4ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ kﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. • ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .Kﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .Program uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ )(HYPERBL ][OPTN]-[HYPERBL • } ... {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanhﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ }ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ{}/ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﻡ{}/ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ{ • } ...
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ )(ANGLE ][OPTN]-[ANGLE • }} ... {g}/{r}/{°ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{}/ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ • }” ’ ... {°ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(،ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ،ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ/ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ/ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ • }” ’ ... {°ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ/ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ/ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ • ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ }” ’ {°ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • }( ...
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ. π )ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ = 100ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ 2 • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. = (90° ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ 1 = )cos ( π rad )(0.5 3 2 !m(SET UP)cccccc2(Rad)J (π)c3w >ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ< !(c (π)/3)w !'c !m(SET UP)cccccc1(Deg)J 2 • sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ sinh 3.6 = 18.28545536 20 = 0.7953654612 15 K6(g)2(HYPERBL)1(sinh) 3.6w K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)'20c15w cosh–1 >ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ< K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)(20 /15)w kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ !x(') 2e+!x(') 5wf ' '2 + 5 = 3.
kﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )(RAND uﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ) 0ﺇﻟﻰ (Ran#, RanList#) (1 ﻳﻮﻟﺪ Ran#ﻭ RanList# 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ 0ﺍﻟﻰ 1ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ .ﻳﻌﻴﺪ Ran#ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ RanList#ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ Ran#ﻭ .RanList# ]Ran# [a 1
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ RanList# ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ )RanList# (4 )K6(g)3(PROB)4(RAND)5(List )ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺃﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ 4)w (.ListAns )RanList# (3, 1 )K6(g)3(PROB)4(RAND)5(List )ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ (.ListAns 3,1)w )ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ 1 ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ (.ListAns w Ran# 0 1(Ran#) 0w )ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ(.
uﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )(RanNorm# ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ 10ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ μﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .σ 1 < n < 999 σ>0 )]RanNorm# (σ, μ [,n ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ .ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ nﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ • ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ nﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﹼ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
uﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )(RanSamp# ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﹰ )]RanSamp#(List X, n [,m ... List Xﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ List 1ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ } ،Ans ،List 26ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{ ،ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ( ... nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻻﺕ )ﻋﻨﺪ ،m = 1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻫﻮ .1 < n < List Xﻭﻋﻨﺪ ،m = 0ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻫﻮ (.1 < n < 999 m = 1 ... mﺃﻭ ) 0ﻋﻨﺪ ،m = 1ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ .
kﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻴﻖ uﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ !n !)(n – r uﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ !n = nCr !)r! (n – r = nPr • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ.
kﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ .ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .1-16 • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ 2 1 73 ––– = –– –– + 3 5 4 20 '2c5e+!'(() 3e1c4w >ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ< 2'5+3'1'4w )*1ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ( = 3.65 f 1 1 ––––– + ––––– = 6.
kﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ )(AND, OR, NOT, XOR ][OPTN]-[LOGIC ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ. • } AND} ... {Xor}/{Not}/{Or}/{Andﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ OR}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ NOT}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ XOR}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ANDﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻟـ Aﻭ Bﺣﲔ A = 3ﻭ B = 2؟ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ 3aav(A)w 2aal(B)w )av(A)K6(g)6(g 4(LOGIC)1(And)al(B)w 1 uﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ • ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ 0ﺃﻭ 1ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ.
.5ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ) K4(CALCﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ . • }÷} ... {Simp}/{Rmdr}/{Intﺣﺎﺻﻞ{}/ﺑﺎﻗﻲ{}/ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ{ • }} ... {SolveN}/{∫dx}/{d2/dx2}/{d/dx}/{Solveﺣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ{}/ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ{}/ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ{}/ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ){f(x • }} ...
kﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ][OPTN]-[CALC]-[Simp ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ " "'Simpﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • ... {Simp} wﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ. ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • ... {Simp} n wﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ .
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 27 ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ 63 ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻝ 9 3 27 = 7 63 A'chcgdw K4(CALC)6(g)6(g)3(Simp)j w • ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. • ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ 'Simpﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ،ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ "="F kﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ][OPTN]-[CALC]-[Solve ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Solveﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻄﺎﻕ. • ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ. (Solve(, d2/dx2(, FMin(, FMax(, Σ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ 10ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ .ListAns • ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "No Solutionﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ. • ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "More solutions may exist.ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺏ .
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ،ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ،Axﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟـ ) f' (aﻛـ: )f (a + Ax) – f (a ––––––––––––– ⱌ )f ' (a Ax ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﻓﻲ x = 3ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6 ) f(xﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ AK4(CALC)2(d/dx)vMde+evx+v-ge ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ x = aﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻪ. dw ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ aﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2-28ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ][OPTN]-[CALC]-[d2/dx2 ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. >ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ< K4(CALC)3(d2/dx2) f(x)ea ﺃﻭ 4(MATH)5(d2/dx2) f(x)ea >ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ< )K4(CALC)3(d2/dx2) f(x),a aﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ][OPTN]-[CALC]-[∫dx ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = (Deg ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﹼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ) (1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ • ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ،f(xﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Xﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ Zﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ (X, r, θ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ " "tolﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ " ،"tolﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ 1 × 10–5 • ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ) (αﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ akﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ) (βﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .ak • ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ nﻭﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺪﺩ ،nﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ .n = 1 • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ βﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺃﻭﻝ αﻭ ﺇﻻ، ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ. • ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Σﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ nﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ. • ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ. • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ nﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ ) (bﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ) .(aﻭﺍﻻ ﹼ ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ/ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .A • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 9ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ .
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) K3(COMPLEXﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • }} ... {iﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ {i • } ... {Arg}/{Absﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ } ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ{ }/ﺣﺠﺔ{ • }} ... {Conjgﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻖ{ • }} ... {ImP}/{RePﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ{ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ • } ... {'a+bi}/{'r∠θﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ }ﻗﻄﺒﻲ{ }/ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ{ • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) !a(iﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ) K3(COMPLEX)1(iﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ.
kﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2∠30 × 3∠45 = 6∠75 !m(SET UP)cccccc 1(Deg)c3(r∠θ)J Ac!v(∠)da*d !v(∠)efw kﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺠﺔ ][OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[Abs]/[Arg ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ a + biﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺳﻲ ،ﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ⎮ ⎮Zﻭ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ).
kﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ][OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[Conjg ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ a + biﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ .a – bi ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ 2 + 4i )AK3(COMPLEX)4(Conjg (c+e1(i))w kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ ][OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[ReP]/[lmP ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ bﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ .
.7ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ,ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ,ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ. • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ.
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. uﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ][SET UP]-[Mode]-[Dec]/[Hex]/[Bin]/[Oct .1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ .Run-Matrix .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .!m(SET UPﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Modeﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 4(Bin), 3(Hex), 2(Dec), ،ﺃﻭ ) 5(Octﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .
uﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻝ 1100102 )!m(SET UP ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " ،"Modeﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .4(Bin)J )A2(LOGIC)1(Neg bbaabaw • ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ. uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ " "12016 and AD16ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ )!m(SET UP ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " ،"Modeﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
.8ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3('MAT/VCTﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 26ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Zﺍﻟﻰ (Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ،(MatAnsﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ ﹰ.
• } ... {DEL-ALL}/{DELETEﻳﺤﺬﻑ } ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ{}/ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ{ • }} ... {DIMﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ({ • } ... {CSVﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSVﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻛﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )Mat A ﺇﻟﻰ Mat Zﻭ ) (MatAnsﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-48 • } ... {M⇔Vﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-60 uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻭﹼﻻ )ﺍﳊﺠﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ( .ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ. uﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ .1ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(DELETE .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ.
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(ROW-OPﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • }} ... {SWAPﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ{ • }} ... { Rowﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ{ • }} ... { Row+ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ{ • }} ... {Row+ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ{ uﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻔﲔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﲡﺮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ،4ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 3 )1(ROW-OP)3( Row+ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ*. ew ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻪ. cw ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ. dww * ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ ).(k uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 3 )1(ROW-OP)4(Row+ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ. cw ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ 2(ROW)c )2(INSERT uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ 2(ROW)cc )3(ADD uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ • }} ... {DELETEﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{ • }} ... {INSERTﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{ • }} ...
kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ CVS ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﻒ CVSﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ ،Mat Zﻭ .(MatAnsﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ ،Mat Zﻭ (MatAnsﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSV uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ. • ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ) "CSVﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(3-18 .
ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ،CSVﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ.ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(2{3{4 → =2+3/4 : ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ :ﹼ'( ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ3 → 1.732050808 : ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ' ﻭ :πﹼ uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ CSV ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(CSV)3(SETﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ .
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. a22 ... a2n a21 ... ... ... ] ]= [ [a11, a12, ..., a1n] [a21, a22, ..., a2n] .... [am1, am2, ..., amn a12 ... a1n a11 am2 ...
uﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Dim ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ A ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 )K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)2(Dim 6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ. ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ } {Dimﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ 10ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 2 1 4 3 6 5 )baaK2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat av(A)!+( )b,c !-( )w • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Vctﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،2ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ )K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat av(A)!+( )c,c !-( )*fw • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Vctﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat→Lst ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Mat→Listﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat]/[Identity ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ )ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ + Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ :(B ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ A 1 1 1 2 ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ B 3 2 1 2 K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A)+ 1(Mat)al(B)w ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ) 1ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ × Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ (B *)K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A 1(Mat)al(B)w • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻌﻬﻢ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﻢ .ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
uﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Trn ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﺎ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 2 1 4 3 6 5 )K2(MAT/VCT)4(Trn)1(Mat av(A)w ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -1ﺻﻒ × -nﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -nﺻﻒ × -1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ .ﻓﻬﻮ • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Trnﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﹰ ﱢ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -mﺻﻒ × -1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ -1ﺻﻒ × -mﻋﻤﻮﺩ.
uﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Rref ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 19 3 −1 2 −21 −5 1 1 0 3 4 0 )K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)5(Rref 6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w • ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
uﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ][x2 ﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 2 1 4 3 )K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A xw uﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ]^[ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ: ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 2 1 4 3 )K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A Mdw • ﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ .
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = D 1+i –2 + 2i –1 + i 1+i )K6(g)4(NUMERIC)1(Abs K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)as(D)w • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ. i, Abs, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ • ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
.9ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Run-Matrixﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).3('MAT/VCT)6(M⇔V ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ) m :ﺻﻔﻮﻑ( × ) 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ) 1ﺻﻒ( × ) nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(. ﻳﹸﻌﺮﱠﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﹴ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ mﻭ nﻫﻲ .999 ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 26ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ )ﻣﻦ Vct Aﺇﻟﻰ (Vct Zﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) (VctAnsﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3('MAT/VCT)6(M⇔Vﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ... m × nﻣﺘﺠﻪ ) mﺻﻒ( × ) nﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ... Noneﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ • } ... {DEL-ALL}/{DELETEﺣﺬﻑ }ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ{}/ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ{ • } ... {DIMﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) mﺻﻔﻮﻑ × 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 1ﺻﻒ × nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ( • } ... {M⇔Vﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-42 ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ )ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ( ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ .
• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻫﻲ ±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ. • ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ. VctAns → Vct α ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺗﺸﻴﺮ αﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ Aﺇﻟﻰ .Zﻭﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ. • ﺛﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Vct ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Vct A + Vct B ] Vct B = [ 3 4 ] Vct A = [ 1 2 )K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct av(A)+1(Vct)al(B)w ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Vct A × Vct B 3 4 = Vct B ] Vct A = [ 1 2 )K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct av(A)*1(Vct)al(B)w ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 3 ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Mat A × Vct B 1 2 = Vct B 2 1
uﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[CrossP ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ] Vct B = [ 3 4 ] Vct A = [ 1 2 )K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g 3(CrossP( )1(Vct)av(A), 1(Vct)al(B))w uﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Angle ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ] Vct B = [ 3 4 ] Vct A = [ 1 2 )K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g 4(Angle( )1(Vct)av(A), 1(Vct)al(B))w uﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ][OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[UnitV ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍ
.10ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻞ 11ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﻫﺎﻡ! ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺗﻴﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺗﻴﺮﻱ.
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ][OPTN]-[CONVERT ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ } ' {2ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ }{1ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ{ • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ {1ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ {2ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ. • ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ' ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﺃﻣﺮﻱ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ )'( 1ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ.
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ fm ﻓﻴﺮﻣﻲ cm3 ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ Å ﺍﳒﺴﺘﺮﻭﻡ mL ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺮ μm ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ L ﻟﺘﺮ cm ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ in3 ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺔ m ﻣﺘﺮ ft3 ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ km ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ AU ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ mm ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ m3 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ )fl_oz(UK ﺍﻭﻧﺲ )fl_oz(US ﺍﻻﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ l.y.
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ °C ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ Pa ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ K ﻛﻠﻔﻦ kPa ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ °F ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ mmH2O ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ °R ﺭﺍﻧﻜﲔ mmHg ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻲ m/s ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ km/h ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ inH2O ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ knot ﻋﻘﺪﺓ inHg ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻴﺔ ft/s ﻗﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ lbf/in2 ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ mile/h ﻣﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ bar u ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺘ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ 6ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 4ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ 2 + 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ewc+dw • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ 999ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ. uﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) { (*! ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ , ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) } ( !/ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ. ) } (!*( { )g,h,i!/ .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻚ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ. K1(LIST)1(List)b+ K1(LIST)1(List)cw • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) !b(Listﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ).K1(LIST)1(List kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ .ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ. uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)2(EDIT .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)5(INSERTﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،0ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﻔﻞ. • ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ.
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix !m(SET UP)2(Line)J !b(List) n!+( [ )a!-( ] )w ) = nﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26 • ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Offﻟـ " "Sub Nameﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. kﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ.
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ .ﻟﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ .ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ .
uﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ ﻣﻌﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ،ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)1(TOOL)1(SORTASC .2ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " "How Many Lists?:ﻟﻴﺴﺄﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ. ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .
kﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﺛﻢ ) 1(LISTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • {List}/{Lst→Mat}/{Dim}/{Fill(}/{Seq}/{Min}/{Max}/{Mean}/{Med}/{Augment}/{Sum}/{Prod}/ }{Cuml}/{%}/{ΔList ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. uﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Lst→Mat > ...
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. )(n = 1 - 999 > wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ n> aK1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <1 - 26ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺕ< ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ (0ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1 )AfaK1(LIST)3(Dim 1(List)bw ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇ ﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .
uﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Min > )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)1(Min)6(g)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26 ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1 )AK1(LIST)6(g)1(Min 6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w uﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Max )> ,1(Listﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)2(Max)6(g)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26 > )wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <1 - 26 • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (75, 89, 98, 72, 67) 2 )AK1(LIST)6(g)4(Med 6(g)6(g)1(List)b, 1(List)c)w uﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Augment • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml > wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26 • ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[ΔList > wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)5(ΔList) <1 - 26 • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. )AK1(LIST)1(List • ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "."List .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ( 26ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ aﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (41, 65, 22) 3ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1 K1(LIST)1(List)da1(List)bw ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ 1(LIST)1(List)dﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ) } (.!*( { )eb,gf,cc!/ uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﲔ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻙ .Y1 = List 1Xﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1 ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،3 ،2 ،1ﻓﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.Y= 3X ،Y=2X ،Y=X : ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Tableﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ .ListAns ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (41, 65, 22) 3ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ (List 3) sin ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ. sK1(LIST)1(List)dw .4ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﻠﻒ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ .
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSV ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSVﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،CSVﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)6(g)1(CSVﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSV ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(2-42ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
.4ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ) 1(LOAD)1(LISTﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،3ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSVﻭﺍﺣﺪ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)6(g)1(CSVﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .CSV .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(SAVE • AS • ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ. .3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV • ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."ROOT • ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE • AS .
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Equation • }} ... {SIMULﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ 2ﺇﻟﻰ 6ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ{ • }} ... {POLYﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ 2ﺇﻟﻰ {6 • }} ... {SOLVERﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{ .1ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
ﳊﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ xﻭ yﻭ z ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 4x + y – 2z = – 1 x + 6y + 3z = 1 – 5x + 4y + z = – 7 m Equation 1 1(SIMUL) 2 )2(3 ewbw-cw-bw 3 bwgwdwbw -fwewbw-hw 1(SOLVE) 4 • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ.
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳊﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ. • ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔax2 + bx + c = 0 (a 0) : • ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻴﺔax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0 (a 0) : … • ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0 (a 0) : .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Equation .2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) POLYﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ( ،ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ 2ﺇﻟﻰ .6 .3ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ.
ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(x3 + 2x2 + 3x + 2 = 0 : ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ) Real :ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-36 ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐa + bi : ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐr∠θ : • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ. • ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﲟﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻞ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ. • ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ. .4ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻞ. ﺗﺸﻴﺮ " "Rgtﻭ " "Lftﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﻞ*. 1 * 1ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ Rgtﻭ Lftﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ،ﻷﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ.
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ. → ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ • ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15 kﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ )(1 ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Graph .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
kﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ )(2 ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Graph .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Graphﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )) ،(Y=f(xﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )) ،(X=f(yﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ. )= ...
) ... 2(Unionﳝﻸ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ. • ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !f(FORMATﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15 ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ) V-Windowﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ ،yﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ.ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ. uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window .1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ,ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Graph .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .
uﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻝ Tθ ptchﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ. • ﺍﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ )ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﺇﻟﺦ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Tθ maxﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ،Tθ minﺗﺼﺒﺢ Tθ ptchﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﻣﺜﻞ (2πﻛﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .V-Window • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.V-Window . .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(V-MEM)2(RECALLﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ. .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Windowﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ).
kﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ. ) ... !2(ZOOM)1(BOXﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ. ) .......................... 2(FACTORﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ xﻭﺍﶈﻮﺭ yﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ. ) .......................... 3(IN)/4(OUTﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ،ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ) ،y = (x + 5)(x + 4)(x + 3ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Windowﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. Xscale = 2 Xmax = 8, Xmin = –8, Yscale = 1 Ymax = 2, Ymin = –4, m Graph 1 !3(V-WIN)-iwiwcwc -ewcwbwJ )3(TYPE)1(Y=)(v+f)(v+e (v+d)w )6(DRAW !2(ZOOM)1(BOX) 2 d~dw 3 d~d,f~fw 4 • ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ،ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K2(PAN • ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ) ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ . .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ • ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ wﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻰ .
.5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ "?"V-Window values for specified background will be loaded. OK ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3pﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ،Tθ minﻭ ،Tθ maxﻭ Tθ ptchﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ .g3p .6ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J uﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ .
.6ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ " "Backgroundﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ • ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ .ﹼ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ. kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ )ﺑﻬﺖ (I/Oﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Backgroundﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟـ ) 0%ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ) 100%ﻛﻞ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( .ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﻒ ،ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟـ 100%ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ.
.3ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 20ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ. .1ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(TYPEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • }= ...
uﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Xt3ﻭ:Yt3 x = 3 sinT y = 3 cosT )) 3(TYPE)3(Paramﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ(. )dsvwﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ (.x )dcvwﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ (.y uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ Y1ﻭ Y2ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻝ Y3ﻭY4 Y1 = (x + 1), Y2 = x2 + 3 ﺗﻌﲔ Y1°Y2ﻟـ ،Y3ﺃﻭ Y2°Y1ﻟـ .
uﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،-1ﻭ ،0ﻭ 1ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﻓﻲ ،Y = AX2ﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )=3(TYPE)1(Y av(A)vx-bw )J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A !.(=)-b)w )J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A !.(=)a)w )J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A !.(=)b)w )ffff1(SELECT )6(DRAW ﰎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Line Styleﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .4ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ. .5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Line Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .6ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
uﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(TOOL)1(STYLE .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ،y = 2x2 – 3ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ،Y1ﺍﻟﻰ ""Broken ) () 4(TOOL)1(STYLE)3ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "(.
uﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .1ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(DELETEﺃﻭ .D .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ. • ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (Xt2ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ) ،Yt2ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ .(Xt2 kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .
• (Off :Label ،On :Axes) Line :Grid ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ .y ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Xscaleﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ 0ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ""Line ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ Gridﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Yscaleﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ 0ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺈﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ. • (Off :Grid ،Off :Label) Off :Axes ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. • (Off :Grid ،Off :Label) Scale :Axes ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ .
uﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(TOOL)2(GPH-MEM)1(STOREﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .(G-Mem1) 1 • ﺗﻮﺟﺪ 20ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ G-Mem1ﺣﺘﻰ .G-Mem20 • ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
kﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ (g3p ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .g3p • ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ PICTﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ Pict01.g3pﺍﻟﻰ .Pict20.g3p ﻣﻌﻴﻦ • ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ.
• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN → .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE • AS .4ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w kﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ) (g3pﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ ) (g3pﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) Pict01.g3pﺍﻟﻰ (Pict20.
.5ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ kﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﲔ .ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ،ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ" ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ، ﹼ ﹼ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ".
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(SELECTﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ” “ Rﺃﻭ " " Bﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻠﻞ ﺑـ " " Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
.6ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrix ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !4(SKETCH)5(GRAPHﺛﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. • } ... {Y=}/{r=}/{Param}/{X=}/{G·∫ dxﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟـ }ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﹶﺭﺗﻴﺔ{}/ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ{/ }ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ{ X=f(y)}/ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﹶﺭﺗﻴﺔ{}/ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ{ • }≤ ...
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ. • ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﹸﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻣﻊ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ (x + 2)(x – 1)(x – 3) dx 1 –2 ∫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ،Xmin = −4 ،Xmax = 4 Xscale = 1 ،Ymin = −8 ،Ymax = 12 Yscale = 5 ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺣﺪﺩ "= "Yﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ".
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ y = Ax2 – 3ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Aﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ –1 ،1 ،3 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ،Xmin = –5 ،Xmax = 5 Xscale = 1 ،Ymin = –10 ،Ymax = 10 Yscale = 2 m Graph 1 !m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J 2 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwbwc 3 -bawbawcwJ 3(TYPE)1(Y=)av(A)vx-d, 4 !+( [ )av(A)!.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ( ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ :ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﻮﺩ .ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ y = 2x2 + 3x – 4ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y=X ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ،Xmin = –5 ،Xmax = 5 Xscale = 2 ،Ymin = –10 ،Ymax = 10 Yscale = 5 m Run-Matrix 1 a-(Y)!.
.7ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Table kﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ uﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ y = 3x2 – 2ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ. uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. • ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ،ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. .2ﻇﻠﻞ " "Variableﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(LISTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. .3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.x- • ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،6ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .gwﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .6 .4ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ " "Derivativeﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Onﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ " "dY/dXﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ. • ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﰎ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ.
kﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺻﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ uﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ xﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1 )K1(LISTMEM ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w bw • ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ.
ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ،ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ -3ﺍﻟﻰ ،3ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1 ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ Y1 = 3x2 – 2, Y2 = x2 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ،Xmin = 0 ،Xmax = 6 Xscale = 1 ،Ymin = –2 ،Ymax = 10 Yscale = 2 m Table 1 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc 2 -cwbawcwJ 3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw 3 vxw 5(SET)-dwdwbwJ 4 6(TABLE) 5 5(GPH-CON) 6 • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y1 = 3x2 – 2ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ. ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ -3ﺍﻟﻰ ،3ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1 ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.8ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟـ Aﻓﻲ (Y = AX2ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. kﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ .ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 5(MODIFYﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Dual Screenﺍﻟﻰ "."Off .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ. • ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) .
-cw 9 J 0 uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ X = H + T؛ Y = K + AT2ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ .A=2 ،H=0 ،K=0ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ H ﺍﻟﻰ -1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ Kﺍﻟﻰ ،-1ﻭﻗﻢ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(PARAMﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ. .
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .cﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ K=0ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .-bw .8ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J kﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ) ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ( ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ. .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K1(COPY • ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .
.9ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ .ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻛﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Dyna Graph .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ. ) ... 1(Contﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ) ...
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،y = A (x – 1)2 – 1ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ A ﻣﻦ 2ﺍﻟﻰ 5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﹼﺍﺕ. m Dyna Graph 1 !3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J 2 !m(SET UP)c2(Stop)J 3 5(BUILT-IN)c1(SELECT) 4 !f(FORMAT)b(Black) 5 4(VAR)cwbw-bw 6 2(SET)cwfwbwJ 7 3(SPEED)3( )J 8 6(DYNA) 9 ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،y = Axﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ .1ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 10ﻣﺮﺍﺕ. m Dyna Graph 1 !3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J 2 !m(SET UP)cc1(On)J 3 5(BUILT-IN)1(SELECT) 4 4(VAR)bwaw 5 2(SET)bwewbwJ 6 3(SPEED)3( )J 7 6(DYNA) 8 →···· ····← kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ DOT ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .5(STOREﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ .1ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ. .2ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(RECALLﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑـ an+2 = an+1 + anﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ) a1 = 1, a2 = 1ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﺒﻮﻧﺎﺗﺸﻲ( ﻛﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ nﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .6 m Recursion 1 3(TYPE)3(an+2) 2 4(n.an ··)3(an+1)+2(an)w 3 5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwbwJ 4 6(TABLE) 5 * ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﻟـ a1 = 1ﻭ .a2 = 1 • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(FORMULAﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ. • ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ " "Onﻟـ " "ΣDisplayﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺿﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
m Recursion 1 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc 2 -bfwgfwfwJ 3(TYPE)2(an+1)c2(an)+bw 3 5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwJ 4 )J 5 (1(SEL+S)f2 6(TABLE) 6 5(GPH-CON) 7 • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-15ﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
m Recursion 1 !3(V-WIN)awcwbwc 2 awewbwJ 3(TYPE)2(an+1)a.j2(an)w 3 4(n.an ··)3(bn)+a.b1(n)-a.cw 5(SET)2(a1)bwbawbwbwJ 4 6(TABLE) 5 3(PHASE) 6 • ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ anﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،bnﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ .
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "ΣDisplay" "Onﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(PHASEﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ. ).........1(a • bﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) bn (bn+1, bn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2 ).........
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ an+1 = –3(an)2 + 3an, bn+1 = 3bn + 0.2 ﻭ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ,ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ : ،Start = 0ﻭ bnStr = 0.11 ،b0 = 0.11 ،anStr = 0.01 ،a0 = 0.01 ،End = 6 m Recursion 1 !3(V-WIN)awbwbwc 2 awbwbwJ 3(TYPE)2(an+1)-d2(an)x+d2(an)w 3 d3(bn)+a.cw 5(SET)1(a0) 4 awgwa.abwa.bbwc a.abwa.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﳕﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ. R w .4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ x = 2y2 + y − 1ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ r = 4cosθﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
.12ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ( ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ .ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﳕﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ. uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﻛﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. • ... Sketch Lineﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ • ...
.8ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ *.w 3 * 1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ. * 2ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ،ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳕﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Sketch Lineﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Plot/LineColﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ. * 3ﻭﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ .
.13ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ kﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. 1 .3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!1(TRACEﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ*. .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺧﻼﻝ • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ،ﻭ ،G-Solveﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻨﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ aDﺗﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ. • ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻛـ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﻛـ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ .
kﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻱ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Graph .2ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!2(ZOOM)6(g)3(ROUNDﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ .Rnd .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!1(TRACEﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ.
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!5(G-SOLVE)1(ROOT .3ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻪ. .4ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻻﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﲔ Y1ﻭ.Y2 Y1 = x + 1, Y2 = x2 • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ) (Y=f(xﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ )) Y > f(xﺃﻭ ) Y < f(xﺃﻭ ) Y ≥ f(xﺃﻭ ) (Y ≤ f(xﻓﻘﻂ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ -ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،!5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)1(∫dxﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w .5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،Y = sin Xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ 21ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺬﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﹼﺘﲔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ. uﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .
uﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)e(MIXED • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭc ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺫﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wﺣﺮﱢﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w .
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !5(G-SOLVEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ • }} ... {e}/{LENGTH}/{VERTEX}/{FOCUSﺑﺆﺭﺓ{}/ﺭﺃﺱ{}/ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ{}/ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ{ • }} ... {SYMMETRY}/{DIRECTXﺩﻟﻴﻞ{}/ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ{ • }} ... {Y-ICEPT}/{X-ICEPTﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y- uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ • }} ... {RADIUS}/{CENTERﻣﺮﻛﺰ{}/ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ{ • }} ...
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ. • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ. • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ d ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻳﺘﻀﻤ ﹼﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻪ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻷﻥ ،ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺭﲟﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ. .
kﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ][GRAPH]-[SET ﻳﺒﲔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ).(GRAPH1, GRAPH2, GRAPH3 • Graph Type ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(GRAPH)6(SETﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ) StatGraphﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ( • } ... {GRAPH1}/{GRAPH2}/{GRAPH3ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ }{1}/{2}/{3 • ) Graph Typeﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ( • }} ... {Pie}/{NPPlot}/{xyLine}/{Scatterﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ{ xy}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ{}/ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ{} /ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ{ • }} ...
ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ: NPPlot, Pie, Bar Hist, Broken ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ: On ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. Off ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. X&Freq ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Xﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ، ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
• } ... {Autoﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(: ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﺔ. ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {Autoﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎ ،ﻭ xyLineﻭ ،NPPlotﺃﻭ .
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ") "Histﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ: • ) Hist Areaﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ(. ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ. • ) Hist Borderﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ(. ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ. • ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ " "Offﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ " "Linkﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ") "MedBoxﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺮﺑﻊ -ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ: • ) Outliersﻗﻴﻤﺔ)ﻗﻴﻢ( ﻣﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ( • }} ...
• ،D1 Areaﻭ ،D2 Areaﻭ) D3 Areaﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟـ ،Data1ﻭ ،Data2ﻭ Data3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ(. ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ. • ،D1 Borderﻭ ،D2 Borderﻭ) D3 Borderﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻟـ ،Data1ﻭ ،Data2ﻭ Data3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ(. ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ.
.2ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻻﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(. ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ .ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ. ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﹼ ﹼ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟـ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6-1ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
kﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﲢﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ 1ﻝ Freqﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ. ⇒ )w(Draw ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ-ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ .ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ] ،[3] ،[2] ،[1ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ،ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳋﻄﻮﻁ 3 ،2 ،1ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃ ﹼﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ.
⇒ )w(Draw ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ –ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).
kﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Stdﻭ OnData ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Q1Q3 Typeﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. Std u ) (1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ nﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ nﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ: ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ :ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ .
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ 9 7 8 ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ 5 6 4 3 2 1 ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ 2+3 = Q1 2 7+8 = Q3 2 ) (2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ. } = Q1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ {0.25 ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.25ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Q1ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
OnData u ﻗﻴﻢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ. } = Q1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ {0.25 } = Q3ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.75ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ {0.75 ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ. )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ(10 : ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ 1 1 1 1/10 = 0.1 2 1 2 2/10 = 0.2 3 2 4 4/10 = 0.
.3ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ( kﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ xy ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ .xy .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ) Scatterﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ( ﺍﻭ ) xyLineﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ (xyﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ. .3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ. .4ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ(ﻣﺜﻞ bﻭ aﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ y = ax + bﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(CALCﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﻭ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ. .............
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﺘﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ،ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻘﻠﹼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ. )1(CALC)3(Med )6(DRAW ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ -ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ. y = ax + b ............ aﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ............
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﻳﻌ ﹼﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ yﻛﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻝ .xﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ،y = a + b × ln x ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻥ ،X = ln xﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .y = a + bX )1(CALC)6(g)2(Log )6(DRAW ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ y = a + b·ln x ............ aﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ............ bﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ yﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ﻝ .
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻦ yﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻝ .xﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ،y = a × xbﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ .ln y = ln a + b × ln xﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ،X = ln xﻭ , Y = ln yﻭ ،A = ln a ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .Y = A + bX )1(CALC)6(g)4(Power )6(DRAW ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ. y = a·xb ............ aﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ............
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ. ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ. c 1 + ae–bx =y )1(CALC)6(g)6(g)1(Logistic )6(DRAW • ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ. kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ– (yﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(CALC)1(2-VAR • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺯﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ......... oﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x ....... Σy2ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y ........
.4ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(CALC)6(SET ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ. .......
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ" ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(CALC)2(2-VAR ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )،(rﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) (r2ﻭ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ )(MSe ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ. ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )(r ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻲ ، ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ.
n • ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔΣ (ln y – (ln a + b ln x )) ........................................ 2 i i i=1 1 = MSe n–2 n • ﻗﻮﺓ ﺟﻴﺒﻴﺔ .......................................... )) Σ (y – (a sin (bx + c) + d 2 i i i=1 2 C • ﻗﻮﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ .......................................
uﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﻛﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ( ،ﻟﻮﺿﻊ Statisticsﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﶈﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ .ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K6(g)3(PROB)6(gﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • }( ... {P(}/{Q(}/{Rﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ }) {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(tﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ. • }(} ... {tﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟـ ){t(x • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ) R(t), P(t), Q(tﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝ ) t(xﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .2 .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. )2(CALC)6(SET 1(LIST)bw )c2(LIST)cw!J(QUIT )2(CALC)1(1-VAR .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ،mﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،Run-Matrixﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K6(g)3(PROB)6(gﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) (PROBﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 3(PROB)6(g)4(t() bga.
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrix .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ).P (0.5 m Run-Matrix 1 !m(SET UP)2(Line)J !4(SKETCH)1(Cls)w 2 )=5(GRAPH)1(Y K6(g)3(PROB)6(g)1(P()a.
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﺘﻤﻊ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ .ﻭ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrixﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ TEST ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،Zﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،tﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-33 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ zﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ p-ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻋﻴﻨﺔ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ: ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) μﺷﺮﻁ( * ،≠ μ0ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ ،μ0 = 0ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ،σ = 1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ،o = 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ .
.5ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ .ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻛﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ( ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ،ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺭﺍ. -1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
ﺗﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(TESTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ) ... 3(TEST)1(Zﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) Zﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ( ) ................... 2(tﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) tﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-37 ) ................... 3(CHIﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) χ2ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-40 ) ...................
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )3(TEST )1(Z )1(1-SAMPLE ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ........ μ≠11.4ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ............... sxﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .......... μ1≠μ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .............. sx1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .............. sx2ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2 uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )3(TEST )1(Z )4(2-PROP ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .......... p1>p2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ p1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2 kﺇﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t • ) ... 1(Tﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ .
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﹰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .t ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. )3(TEST )2(t )1(1-SAMPLE ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ........ μ≠11.3ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .......... μ1≠μ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ............... spﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2 LinearReg uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) (x, yﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ a, bﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ .
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(COPYﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ] [Resid Listﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ LinearRegﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ β & ρﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2 • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑـ ] [Save Resﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ] [Resid Listﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .
ﺛﻢ ،ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. ..... Observedﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ( ...... Expectedﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ........ CNTRBﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ........
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﲔ ﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻷﻗﻞ .ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Matﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ " "Observedﻭ" "Expectedﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ .(Z • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2('MATﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ. • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6('MATﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ) ... 1(Fﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ .F ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ Fﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Fﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻞ -ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ. • ) ... 2(Pﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.p- ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ p-ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Executeﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ) ... 6(DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻓﻘﻂ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ(. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ....(ERR) 4ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ .MS .................... Fﻗﻴﻤﺔ F .................... pﻗﻴﻤﺔp- .................. dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ................... SSﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ................. MSﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ،Bﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ X-ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ .Aﺍﶈﻮﺭ Y-ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ.
ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 3ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ .ﻭ ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 2ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ. ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ) (Aﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ P = 0.2458019517 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) (p = 0.2458019517ﻫﻮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) ،(0.05ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ. • ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ) (Bﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ P = 0.04222398836 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) (p = 0.04222398836ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) ،(0.05ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ.
.6ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ( ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ. ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ( .ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ ،ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻳﺤﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ. ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ 95%ﻭ .99%ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻮﺳﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ .
uﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ 0 < C-Level < 1ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ C-Levelﻳﻌ ﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ. ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ 1 < C-Level < 100ﻳﻌ ﹼﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ .100 kﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z -1 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ Z -1ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ. ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
-1 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ Z -1ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ Zﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. )4(INTR )1(Z )3(1-PROP ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ -2 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﲔ Z -2ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﲔ Zﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ -2 uﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ t -2ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ tﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ tﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .t ﲡﺮﻱ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. )4(INTR )2(t )2(2-SAMPLE .7ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ،ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ .
ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ. ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ tﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Stat Windﻳﻜﻮﻥ " ."Autoﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Stat Windﻳﻜﻮﻥ "."Manual • ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ P-CALﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ p-ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ P-CALﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ ،t-ﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ،χ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ .
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ )5(DIST)1(NORM)2(Ncd ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔx- ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt- • ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt- )5(DIST)2(t)1(tpd ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ )(pﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt- )5(DIST)2(t)3(Invt ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ.t- kﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ χ2 • ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ χ2 )5(DIST)3(CHI)1(Cpd ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ) (pﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2 )5(DIST)3(CHI)2(Ccd ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ χ2ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2 )5(DIST)3(CHI)3(InvC ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ F • ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ F )5(DIST)4(F)1(Fpd ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ Fﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ (p) Fﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ F )5(DIST)4(F)3(InvF ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ d:dfﻭ ) n:dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺴﻂ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ( ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ .
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ )5(DIST)5(BINOMIAL)2(Bcd ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ( ﻫﻮ ،xﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ) ،p(xﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ. ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ) `xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInv ﻭ ،`xInvﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ )5(DIST)6(g)1(POISSON)2(Pcd ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ xﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ) p(xﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ. ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ) `xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInv ﻭ ،`xInvﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)2(Gcd ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ( ﻫﻲ ،xﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ) ،p(xﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ. ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ) `xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInv ﻭ ،`xInvﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ. • ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ )5(DIST)6(g)3(HYPRGEO)3(InvH ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
.8ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ. kﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ .................................. Dataﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ -1) μﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ( .............ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )" "≠ μ0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ "< μ0" ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ "> μ0" ،ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(. -2) μ1ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ( ..........
...................................Freqﺗﺮﺩﺩ ) 1ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26 .................................Freq1ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1) 1ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26 .................................Freq2ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1) 2ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26 ............................. Executeﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ........................................ oﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ...................................... o1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1 ....................................... o2ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2 .
kﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ........................................ zﻋﻼﻣﺔ z ........................................ pﻗﻴﻤﺔp- ......................................... tﻋﻼﻣﺔ t ....................................... χ2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ χ2 ....................................... Fﻗﻴﻤﺔ F ̂ .........................................pﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ....................................... p̂1ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1 .......................................
.
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔk ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ:Lower ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ:Upper ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ Lower, Upper = o + Z (α /2) · σ/' n ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔZ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-1 Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + Z(α /2) σ12/n1 + σ22/n2 ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔZ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-2 Lower, Upper = x/n + Z(α /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n)) ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔZ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-1 Lower, Upper = (x1/n1 – x2/n2) + Z(α /2) (x1/n1 · (1 – x1/n1))/n1 + (x2/n2 · (1 – x2/n2))/n2 ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔZ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-2 Lower, Upper = o + tn−1(α /2) · sx/' n ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔt ﻓﺎﺻﻞ-1 Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + tn1+n2−2 (α /2
( ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞk ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ – p(x) = 1 e 2πσ (x – μμ)2 2σ (σ > 0) 2 – x2 df + 1 1+ Γ 2 df p(x) = × π × df df Γ 2 p= ∫ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ df+1 2 t-ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ Upper df p(x)dx p(x) = 1 × 1 2 df Γ 2 Lower ndf + ddf 2 p(x) = ndf ddf Γ ×Γ 2 2 Γ ndf ddf 2 df ×x 2 –1 – ×e x 2 χ2 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ (x ⭌ 0) ndf ndf –1 2 x 2 – ndf + ddf 2 1 + ndf × x ddf F ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ (x ⭌ 0) ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ p= ∫ Upper p(x)dx p= Lower tail = Central ∫ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ∞ p= p(x
kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ :nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ )(x = 0, 1, ·······, n ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ :λﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )( λ > 0 )··· (x = 0, 1, 2, ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ )··· (x = 1, 2, 3, × N – MC n – x NC n ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ MC x p(x) = nC x p x(1–p)n – x e– λ × λ x !x = )p(x p(x) = p(1– p)x – 1 = )p(x :nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺮﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (0 x :Mﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) Aﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (0 M :
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. • ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) (PVﺍﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ) (PRCﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ. .
kﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ Payment u • } … {END}/{BEGINﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ }ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ{}/ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ{ Date Mode u • } … {360}/{365ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ }ﻳﻮﻡ}/{365-ﻳﻮﻡ{360- ) Periods/YR. uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ( • }} … {Semi}/{Annualﺳﻨﻮﻱ{}/ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ{ Graph Color u • } … {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellowﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳋﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ.
.2ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ. uﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ I% 100 I% =i 100 ﻭﺿﻊ 365ﻳﻮﻡ =i ﻭﺿﻊ 360ﻳﻮﻡ SI' = n × PV × i 365 SI' = n × PV × i 360 'SI = –SI ) 'SFV = –(PV + SI : SI : n : PV : I% : SFV ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SIMPLEﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRACEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ eﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) ← (PVﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ) ← (SIﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ) .(SFVﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ. .3ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
I %u ) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ. PV + α × PMT + β × FV = 0 ﺍﻟﻰ I %ﻣﻦ ) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ( )i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1 } )ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ( –1 × C/Y × 100... P/Y C/Y ) (1+ i {{ = I% .......... nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ........ FVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ........ I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ ........P/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ........ PVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ .......
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ) (nﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) (PVﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ) (FVﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ) PVﺍﻭ (FVﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
.4ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ( ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﺼﻮﻡ ) (DCFﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﲟﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ. ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ. • ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )(NPV • ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )(NFV • ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )(IRR • ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ )(PBP ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﳌﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ.
PBP u CFk (1 + i)k )0 .................................. (CF0 > 0 n Σ k = NPVn =0 NPVn )ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ( ... –n NPVn+1 – NPVn { = PBP :nﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ NPVn < 0ﺃﻭ NPVn+1 > 0ﺃﻭ 0 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CASHﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ. )3(CASH ....... I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ......
.5ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻱ ،ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ. uﺍ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ a ﺩﻓﻊ 1 c b 1 ............ PM1 ................... PM2 .......... Last ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ :aﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (INT) PM1 :bﺍﳊﺼﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (PRN) PM1 :cﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (BAL) PM2 e ﺩﻓﻊ 1 d 1............. PM1................ PM2 ........
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Endﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩBAL0 = PV : • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Beginﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ PRN1 = PMT :ﻭ INT1 = 0 uﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ I%ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )'(I% ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ. • }} … {BALﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ {PM2 • }} … {INTﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ {PM1 • }} … {PRNﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ {PM1 • }} … {ΣINTﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ {PM2 • }} … {ΣPRNﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ {PM2 • }} … {COMPNDﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ{ • ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
.6ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ. ﹼ uﺻﻴﻐﺔ n APR/100 EFF = 1+ –1 × 100 n –1 × n ×100 1 n : APRﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ )(% : EFFﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )(% :ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ n EFF APR = 1+ 100 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(CONVERTﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ. )5(CONVERT ......... nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ...
.7ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ،ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. uﺻﻴﻐﺔ : CSTﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ : SELﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ : MRGﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(COSTﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. )6(g)1(COST ....... Cstﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ........Selﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ....... Mrgﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
.8ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﲔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(DAYSﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. )6(g)2(DAYS ......... d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ 1 ......... d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ 2 ......... Dﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ d1ﺍﻭ .d2ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ 360 -ﻳﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ 360ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d1ﻭ d2ﻫﻤﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺒﺮﺍﻳﺮ )ﻳﻮﻡ 28ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ 29ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺴﺔ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d2ﻛﻴﻮﻡ .30 • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d1ﻫﻮﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺒﺮﺍﻳﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d1ﻛﻴﻮﻡ .30 • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d2ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ 31ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭ d1ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ 30ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ 31ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d2ﻛﻴﻮﻡ .30 • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d1ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ 31ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d1ﻛﻴﻮﻡ .
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ – ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ )(SYD }{Y–1 )n (n +1 – n' = n 2 12 )ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ' + 2*nﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ' +1)(nﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ '(n = 'Z 2 n }{Y–1 × ) (PV – FV = SYD1 Z 12 n'– j+2 ))(PV – FV – SYD1 ( = SYDj )( j≠1 'Z n'– (n +1)+2 }12–{Y–1 ( = SYDn+1 × ))(PV – FV – SYD1 )({Y–1}≠12 'Z 12 =Z RDV1 = PV – FV – SYD1 : SYDjﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j : RDVjﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ. • }} … {SLﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ{ • }} .. {FP} ... {FPﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ{ }} ..
: PRCﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ : CPNﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻌﺮ )(% : YLDﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ )(% A :ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ M :ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ )=1ﺳﻨﻮﻱ،ﻭ =2ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ( N :ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ. : RDVﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻟﻜﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ D :ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ.
......... d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ( ......... d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ( ..... RDVﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ..... CPNﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ..... PRCﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ......YLDﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ • ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻮ 1ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ , 1902ﺍﻟﻰ 31ﺩﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ .2097 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ MEMOﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ,ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ) (CPDﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Date Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ "."365 .11ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻟﺴﻨﺘﲔ )–730ﻳﻮﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺽ 300ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ .
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ. .1ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ. ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. .2ﹼ .3ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
m Program 1 3(NEW)j(O)I(C)/(T)v(A)w 2 !J(PRGM)4(?)aav(A)6(g)5(:) 3 )^(c*!x(')d*av(A)x6(g)6(g)5 !x(')c/d*av(A)Md JJ 1(EXE) 4ﺃﻭ w )hwﻗﻴﻤﺔ (A Sﻋﻨﺪ 7 = A Vﻋﻨﺪ 7 = A w ww baw Sﻋﻨﺪ 10 = A Vﻋﻨﺪ 10 = A w ww bfw Sﻋﻨﺪ 15 = A Vﻋﻨﺪ 15 = A w*1 * 1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ • }} ... {BASE}/{RUNﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ{}/ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ{ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ •} { } ...ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ{ • }} ... {SYMBOLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ —— ) … 1(RUNﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ • }} ... {BOTTOM}/{TOPﺍﻋﻠﻰ{}/ﺍﺳﻔﻞ{ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ • }} ... {SEARCHﺑﺤﺚ{ • }} ... {MENUﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ{ • }{RECURSION}/{TABLE}/{DYNA}/{GRAPH}/{LIST}/{MAT}/{STAT } ...ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺀ{}/ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{}/ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{}/ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ{}/ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ{}/ﺟﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﻋﻮﺩﻳﺔ{ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ —— *)2(BASE * ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(BASEﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑـ Bﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. • }{TOP}/{BOTTOM}/{SEARCH • }{MENU • }} ... {d~oﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{}/ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ • }} ... {LOGICﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ{ • } ... {DISPLAYﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ }ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{}/ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{ • }{A⇔a}/{SYMBOL • ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !J(PRGMﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • }} ...
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺎ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ. uﻟﻠﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻚ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ. ).......... 1(TOPﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ).. 2(BOTTOMﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. kﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ " "Aﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺏ OCTA .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. .
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w • ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ uﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ OCTA .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)1(SEARCHﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. )6(g)1(SEARCH )j(O)I(C)/(T .2ﺍﺻﻐﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ. • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Not Foundﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .
uﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻰ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-10ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ. uﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ USBﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ / PROGRAM /@MainMem/Storage Memoryﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
kﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ. • ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. • ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. uﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(NEWﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( 5ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ .
ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭk . ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀﻩc ﻭf ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ، ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.1 .2(EDIT) ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ.2 . ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞw ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ.3 ."• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻰ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.5 ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮk 8-27 ................................................RclCapt 8-15 ....................................................Break 8-24 ...........................................
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ. ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﹼ }ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺠﻌﺪﺓ{ ................ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻌﺪﺓ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ،ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻌﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ. ]ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ[ ..................ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ. ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ..................ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻙ (A,10, 10 + 20ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ........................
) :ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ-ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﲔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ. ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ )^( ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻦ. • ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑـ _ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ. _ )ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ. ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: )If ~ Then ~ IfEnd (1 • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Then-ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd )If ~ Then ~ Else ~ IfEnd (2 • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Then-ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Else-ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ) ،(0ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ.LpWhile- • ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ،LpWhile-ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ. While~WhileEnd ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(.
Prog ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،RUN-MATﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ" :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" Prog ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝProg "ABC" : ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
Stop ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐStop : ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻧﺎﺷﻰﺀ. kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ )(JUMP ) Dszﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ.
) Iszﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: >ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< _ : ^ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ≠ 0 > :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< Isz >ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = 0 ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ A :ﺍﻟﻰ θ ،r ،Z ]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ : lsz Aﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﺑـ .1 ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ )ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ( .
Menu ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>, :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ >", <1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( >", "<1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(<" Menu >ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ >", , ... , "", <2ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( "<2 ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) 0ﺍﻟﻰ ،(9ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (θ ،r ،Z ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ >ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ >",
ClrMat ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ< ClrMat ClrMat ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ A :ﺍﻟﻰ Ans ،Z ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ". ClrText ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐClrText : ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ClrVct ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ DrawGraph ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ. ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﻣﻊ bn) anﺃﻭ (cnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ nﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ. ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ,ﻣﻊ bn) anﺃﻭ (cnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ n ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
PlotPhase ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ.y- ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ>,
Locate ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
(Receive( / Send ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>) :ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<(>) / Sendﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<(Receive ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ( ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ • ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ -ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ( OpenComport38k / CloseComport38k ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ) 3-pin COMﺍﳌﺴﻠﺴﻞ(. ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻣﺮ Receive38k/Send38kﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
kﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻛـ " ("123ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ )ﻛـ " ("x-1ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Locateﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-23 • ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )"( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ (\) .
(StrInv ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrInv (StrJoin ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ "<1ﻭ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ."<2 ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ >", "<2ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ StrJoin("<1 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ") "+ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-27 (StrLeft ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ nﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", n[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrLeft ) n ،0 < n < 9999ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( (StrLen ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ(.
(StrRotate ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ.n ) n ،–9999 < n < 9999ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", [,n)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrRotate ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ " "nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ " "nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ " "nﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ.+1 ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ........ StrRotate("abcde", 2) :ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ""cdeab (StrShift ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﳝﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ .
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻧﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ :RUN Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow, ColorAuto, ColorClr ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow :BASE • ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMAT)) !f(FORMAT)b(Color Commandﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .
- ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹲ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ. ">ﻧﺺ<" )"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" ،ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ) Locate ،(8-30ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ) SetG-Color ،(8-23ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(8-33 ) Plot/Line-Colorﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-33 • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺭﻓﺎﻗﻪ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ .ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺮﺽ ""CASIO CASIO ?→X ? "X =" ? → X ?=X • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
uﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ )(Swap ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1 ﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭﺻﻒ 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 2 1 4 3 6 5 ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. _Swap A, 2, 3, ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Mat A ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. uﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ )(`Row ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 4 ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
uﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ )(Row+ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ 2ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 4 ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. _Row+ A, 2, 3 ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Mat A kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• Graph Color >ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< >,ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ< ..... SetG-Colorﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺇﻟﻰ 20 >ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ< >,ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ< ..... SetG-Colorﻋﻨﺼﺮ ،bn+1 ،an+1ﺍﻟﺦ. • Zoom >ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ >, ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ................... StoPictﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ 20 "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻠﺪ\ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" StoPict >ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ...................
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Backgroundﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. • ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ]> [,aﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ..... BG-Pictﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ 20 ]" [,aﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ \ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" BG-Pict ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ " "aﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺪﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ _ .... an+1 Typeﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ. • ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ )SortA (List 1, List 2, List 3 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺯﺓ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ( • ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )SortD (List 1, List 2, List 3 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺯﺓ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ( kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ " "MedBoxﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ: • ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ • ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*( • ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ) Whiskerﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*( • ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻓﺎﺕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*( • ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ* ﺃﻭ (ColorAuto • ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )(ColorNormal, ColorLighter ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ " "Barﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ: • ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭﹼﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( • ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( • ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) Lengthﺃﻭ (
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ. S-Gph1 DrawOn, Linear, List 1, List 2, List 3, Blue ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﻸﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ " "Linearﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻖ. ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ Linear ................................. ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻲ Log ............................... ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ-ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂMed-Med ......................... ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺳﻲ Exp(a·eˆbx) ..........................................
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. • ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ]DrawDistNorm , [,σ, μ 1 ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ* ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ* ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ * 1ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ μ = 0ﻭ .
• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2 >DrawDistChi , ,
kﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ • ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ 1-Variable List1, List 2 ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )(Frequency ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(XList) x- • ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ 2-Variable List 1, List 2, List 3 ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )(Frequency ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(YList) y- ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(XList) x- • ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ LinearReg(ax+b) List 1, List 2, List 3 ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )(Frequency ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ* ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(YList) y- ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(XList)
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ LogisticReg List 1, List 2 ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(YList) y- ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(XList) x- kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺣﺬﻓﺖ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ )] [(. ،μ=0 ،σ=1ﻃﺮﻑ=(Left) L • ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-69 • ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ( :NormPDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
• ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖt- ( :tPDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ) t-ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐtPD(x, df [)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ .xﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ pﻭ Ans ) ListAnsﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ xﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. ( :tCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ) t-ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐtCD(Lower,Upper,df [)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،pﻭ ،tLowﻭ tUp ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،pﻭ ،tLowﻭ .
• ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ F ( :FPDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ) Fﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐFPD(x,ndf,ddf [)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ .xﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ pﻭ ListAns) Ans ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. ( :FCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ) Fﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐFCD(Lower,Upper,ndf,ddf [)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ pﻭ ListAns) Ansﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(.
• ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ( :PoissonPDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐPoissonPD(x, λ[)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ .xﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ pﻭ ListAns) Ans ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. ( :PoissonCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐPoissonCD([Lower,] Upper, λ[)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ pﻭ ) Ansﺃﻭ .
• ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ ( :HypergeoPDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐHypergeoPD(x, n, M, N[)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻝ .xﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ pﻭ ListAns) Ans ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. ( :HypergeoCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐHypergeoCD([Lower,] Upper, n, M, N[)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ .
:TwoSampleZTestﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ -Zﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: TwoSampleZTest "μ1 condition", σ1, σ2, o1, n1, o2, n2 ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ: ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .6 ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: ]]TwoSampleZTest "μ1 condition", σ1, σ2, List1, List2[, Freq1 [, Freq2 ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ: ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .
• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2 :ChiGOFTest ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ chi-Square goodnessﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: ChiGOFTest List 1, List 2, df, List 3 )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ ،ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (CNTRB ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ: ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ χ2, p, dfﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .3ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ CNTRBﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3 :ChiTest ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ: Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, Bdf, Bss, Bms, BF, Bp, ABdf, ABss, ABms, ABF, ABp, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRmsﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ Adf, SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Bdf, SSb, MSb, Fb, pb, ABdf, SSab, MSab, Fab, pab, Edf, SSe, .MSe ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻝ MatAnsﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
• ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ P/Yﻭ C/Yﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ P/Y=12ﻭ .C/Y=12 • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ )(Cmpd_n(, Cmpd_I% ,(Cmpd_PV(, Cmpd_PMT(, Cmpd_FV(,ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ )ﺍﳊﺠﺞ( ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ) , n, I% ,PVﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(.ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
:Amt_ΣINT ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ .PM2 ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: )Amt_ΣINT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y :Amt_ΣPRNﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ .PM2 ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: )Amt_ΣPRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y • ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ :Cnvt_EFF ﺍﶈﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ. ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: )Cnvt_EFF(n, I% ﺍﶈﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ.
RANGE Σan+2 Σbn Σbn+1 Σbn+2 Σcn Σcn+1 Σcn+2 a0 a1 GRHCLR Σa n+2 Σb n Σb n+1 Σb n+2 Σc n Σc n+1 Σc n+2 Sel_a 0 Sel_a 1 SetG-Color_ STAT FMax Σ( FMax( Σ( logab log a b( Int÷ Rmdr Simp x̂ ŷ DIST StdDev Var 1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ LIST MAT/VCT COMPLEX CALC K ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ List Lst→Mat Dim Fill( Seq Min Max Mean Med Augment Sum Prod Cuml % ΔList Mat Mat→Lst Det Trn Augment Identity Dim Fill( Ref Rref Vct DotP( CrossP( Angle( UnitV( Norm( i Abs Arg Conjg ReP ImP 'r∠θ 'a+bi Solve d/dx d2/dx2 ∫ dx So
TMPR VELOCITY MASS FORCE PRESSURE ENERGY POWER s min h day week yr s-yr t-yr °C K °F °R m/s km/h knot ft/s mile/h u mg g kg mton oz lb slug ton(short) ton(long) N lbf tonf dyne kgf Pa kPa mmH2O mmHg atm inH2O inHg lbf/in² bar kgf/cm² eV J calth cal15 calIT kcalth kcal15 kcalIT I-atm kW•h ft•lbf Btu erg kgf•m W calth/s hp ft•lbf/s [s] [min] [h] [day] [week] [yr] [s-yr] [t-yr] [°C] [K] [°F] [°R] [m/s] [km/h] [knot] [ft/s] [mile/h] [u] [mg] [g] [kg] [mton] [oz] [lb] [slug] [ton(short)] [ton(long)] [N]
CASH AMORTZN CONVERT COST DAYS BOND J ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ V-WIN X Y T,θ R-X R-Y R-T, θ FACTOR STAT I% PV PMT FV NPV IRR PBP NFV BAL INT PRN ΣINT ΣPRN EFF APR Cost Sell Margin PRD PRC YLD Xfct Yfct X Y min max scale dot min max scale min max pitch min max scale dot min max scale min max pitch n x Σx Σx2 σx sx minX maxX y Σy Σy2 Σxy Cmpd_I%( Cmpd_PV( Cmpd_PMT( Cmpd_FV( Cash_NPV( Cash_IRR( Cash_PBP( Cash_NFV( Amt_BAL( Amt_INT( Amt_PRN( Amt_ΣINT( Amt_ΣPRN( Cnvt_EFF( Cnvt_APR(
a2 b0 b1 b2 c0 c1 c2 anStart bnStart cnStart EQUATION FINANCE Result SimRes SimCoef PlyRes PlyCoef n I% PV PMT FV P/Y C/Y Str 1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ COMMAND CONTROL JUMP ? ^ CLEAR DISPLAY a2 b0 b1 b2 c0 c1 c2 a n Start b n Start c n Start R_Result Sim_Result Sim_Coef Ply_Result Ply_Coef n I% PV PMT FV P/Y C/Y Str_ !J(PRGM) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ If Then Else IfEnd For To Step Next While WEnd Do LpWhile Prog Return Break Stop Lbl Goto ⇒ Isz Dsz Menu Text Graph List Mat Vct Stat Graph Dyna FUNCTAB RECRTA
ENG SKT/LIN On Off Eng — — ····· ······ — DRAW DERIV BACK FUNC SIMUL SGV-WIN LIST LOCUS TBL-VAR ΣDISP RESID COMPLEX FRAC Y=SPEED DATE PMT PERIODS INEQ SIMP Q1Q3 Connect Plot On Off None Pict OPEN On Off On Off Auto Manual File On Off Range List On Off None List Real a+bi r∠θ d/c ab/c Norm High 365 360 Begin End Annual Semi Intsect Union Auto Manual Std OnData P/L-CLR EngOn EngOff Eng S-L-Normal S-L-Thick S-L-Broken S-L-Dot S-L-Thin G-Connect G-Plot DerivOn DerivOff BG-None BG-Pict_ *8 (8-59 )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
BASE ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 4(MENU) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ d~o LOGIC DISPLAY d h b o Neg Not and or xor xnor 'Dec 'Hex 'Bin 'Oct ? ^ RELATNL : ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ d h b o Neg_ Not_ and or xor xnor 'Dec 'Hex 'Bin 'Oct !J(PRGM) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ Prog JUMP 3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ Lbl Goto ⇒ Isz Dsz Menu = ≠ > < ≥ ≤ *1 Exp *2 MARK STICK %DATA None COLOR LINK *3 X *4 EXP *5 NORM ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ Prog_ Lbl_ Goto_ ⇒ Isz_ Dsz_ Menu_ ? ^ = ≠ > < ≥ ≤ : t CHI F BINOMIAL POISSON GEO 1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ Dec He
ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ7* ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢK6(g)1(CONVERT) .ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ " ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒOPEN" ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ8* ﻠﹼﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍ.ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ : ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ.ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ."Pict\Pict01.
.8ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ⇔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-7 ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻲ )_( ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺃﻣﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ .
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ e^ ﺃﻣﺮ e^ ﻧﺺ Intg ∑xy Int Int Not Not ﺃﻣﺮ Intg Plot Sigmaxy Plot ﻧﺺ Det Det Arg Arg Conjg Conjg ReP ReP ImP ImP ^ ^ × ½ Lbl Lbl or or Fix Fix d/dx( d/dx( ! ! Sci Sci d /dx ( d^2/dx^2( r rad Dsz Dsz Solve( Solve( minY minY Isz Isz Σ( Sigma( minX minX Factor Factor FMin( FMin( n Statn ViewWindow ViewWindow FMax( FMax( Line Line 2 2 sinh−1 sinh^−1 Goto Goto Seq( Seq( cosh −1 cosh^−1 Prog Prog Min( Min( tanh−1 ta
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ PV Financial PV Or Or r Graphr PMT Financial PMT Not Not Xt GraphXt FV Financial FV Xor Xor Yt GraphYt X GraphX List1 Σan+ Sigmaan+1 List2 List2 Σbn+ 1 Sigmabn+1 SSb SSb List3 List3 Σcn+1 Sigmacn+1 SSab SSab List4 List4 Σan+2 Sigmaan+2 MSb MSb List5 List5 Σbn+ Sigmabn+2 MSab MSab List6 List6 Σcn+ Sigmacn+2 [ns] [ns] List1 1 2 2 Q1 Q1 Int÷ Int/ [μs] [micros] Q3 Q3 Rmdr Rmdr [ms] [ms] x1 x1 Fa Fa [s
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ [mm] [mm] [cm] [m] ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻧﺺ Logistic [cal15] [cal15] [cm] [kcal15] [kcal15] [m] [kcalth] [kcalth] Pie Pie [km] [km] [kcalIT] [kcalIT] Bar Bar [Mil] [Mil] If If DotG [in] [in] Then Then 1-Variable [ft] [ft] Else Else [yd] [yd] [fath] [fath] [rd] [rd] To To QuadReg QuadReg [mile] [mile] Step Step CubicReg CubicReg [n mile] [n_mile] QuartReg QuartReg [acre] [acre] While While LogReg LogReg [ha] [ha] WhileEnd WhileEnd
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ BG-None BG-Pict ﺃﻣﺮ BG-None BG-Pict ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ File6 File6 Y=DrawSpeedNorm Y=DrawSpeedNorm Y=DrawSpeedHigh Y=DrawSpeedHigh ﻧﺺ VarList VarList ClrMat ClrMat ZoomAuto ZoomAuto GridOff GridOff GridLine GridLine FuncOn FuncOn Xdot Xdot GridOn GridOn SimulOn SimulOn RightXdot R-Xdot Exp(a·b^x) Exp(a^bx) AxesOn AxesOn D Var CoordOn CoordOn DrawDistT DrawDistT LabelOn DrawDistChi DrawDistChi DrawDistF DrawDistF D Var DrawDistNorm DrawDistNorm Q1Q3Type
ﺃﻣﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ InvTCD( InvTCD( ﻧﺺ Days_Prd( Days_Prd( ChiPD( ChiPD( OneSampleZTest OneSampleZTest ChiCD( ChiCD( TwoSampleZTest TwoSampleZTest InvChiCD( InvChiCD( OnePropZTest OnePropZTest FPD( FPD( TwoPropZTest TwoPropZTest FCD( FCD( OneSampleTTest OneSampleTTest InvFCD( InvFCD( TwoSampleTTest TwoSampleTTest BinomialPD( BinomialPD( LinRegTTest LinRegTTest BinomialCD( BinomialCD( ChiGOFTest ChiGOFTest InvBinomialCD( InvBinomialCD( ChiTest ChiTest PoissonPD( Po
.9ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،Aﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﺑـ (2, 3, 5, 7......) Bﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ .A • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ .A • ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ .B > A ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲟﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ،ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ،ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ( ﻟـ .X :Y1ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ :Y2ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ :Y3ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ :Y4ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ :Y5ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟـ Y3ﻭ Y4 ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ Y1ﻭ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ،ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ. ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Spreadsheet ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ. .1ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Spreadsheetﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .
ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ eActivity ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ 60ﻛﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ .ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ eActivity ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 30ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ .ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ) eActivityﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 15 ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .eActivity ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ eAcitivityﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ .
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ • } ... {GRABﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ GRABﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ. • } ... {$ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ).($ • } ... {:ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ).(: • } ... {Ifﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ (.CellIf • } ... {CELLﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • (CellMin(, CellMax(, CellMean(, CellMedian(, CellSum(, CellProd • } ... {RELATNLﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ≤ =, ≠, >, <, ≥, .
uﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)2(OPEN .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(DELETE .3ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻳﺔ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ. .4ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J • ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ " "SHEETﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)5(CSV)2(SAVE • AS • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ. .3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV • ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."ROOT • ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ).1(OPEN .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(SAVE • AS .5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w • ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ، ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ،ﺍﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ JUMP ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ: ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(EDIT)4(JUMP)1(GO .2ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ) A1ﺍﻟﻰ (Z999ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w ﺧﻂ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )↑.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)2(TOP ﻋﻤﻮﺩ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )←.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)3(TOP ﺧﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )↓.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)4(BTM ﻋﻤﻮﺩ Zﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )→.
kﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﻧﺺ ،ﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ( ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ. uﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ،ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﲟﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻪ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ، ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ،A1×2 ،sin30 ،7+3ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=( ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ .ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ sdawﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) 0.5ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Degﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(. uﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .
ﺑﻨﻮﺩ 1st Cell ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ) ،B2 ،A1ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ .ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ. ﻣﺜﻼ(B1) al(B)bw : • ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻧﺰﻭﻻ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
uﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ C TOTAL A B PRICE QUANTITY 1 525 15 35 2 780 15 52 3 1560 20 78 4 ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ .1ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﺴﻄﺮ ،1ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ A2ﺍﻟﻰ .B4 .2ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،C2ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟـ .A2 × B2 !.(=)av(A)c*al(B)cw .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ C2ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ C3ﻭ .C4ﻭ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ C2ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ GRAB ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ B1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. !.(=)1(GRAB)d1(SET)+fw • ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ) 2(GOﺍﻟﻰ )→ 6(BTMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(GRABﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻓﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ ) 1(GOﺍﻟﻰ )→ 5(BTMﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ .JUMPﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ JUMPﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .9-7 kﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ:ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ .
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﺃﺧﻒ(. uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .1ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ. .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ: ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) b(Char Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ bﺍﻟﻰ iﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
kﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ. uﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ. • ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-6ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(EDIT)2(COPY • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ).
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﺺ ﺍﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ. o ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ B1:C1ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ =B1+5ﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ .B2:C2ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻣﻦ C2ﺍﻟﻰ =B2+5ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺥ. uﻗﺺ ﻭﻟﺼﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .
kﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ .ﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ B1, B2 ،B3ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .B1ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
kﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ. uﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. • ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(9-7 • ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ Syntax ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ. .2ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀﻩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ. • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. ﻣﺜﺎﻻ :ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،2ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،B2:C4 ،A2:A4ﺍﻟﺦ. • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Spreadsheetﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ Spreadsheetﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ,) CellSumﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،ﻭ ,(Celllfﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ. kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Spreadsheetﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ "ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ" ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ )] [( ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ.
ﺍﻷﻣﺮ (CellMedian )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( (CellSum )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( (CellProd )ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ. ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CELL)4(Med) : ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ:ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(CellMedian ﻣﺜﺎﻝ=CellMedian(A3:C5) : ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5 ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
.4ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (A1<0ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ،ﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ( ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ. kﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ. ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)5(CONDITﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ. ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ،ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ " "Conditionﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(COND1ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻁ 1ﺃﻭ ) 2(COND2ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻁ .
• Expression :Type ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (CelMin(A1:B10)≤C1ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ .ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻛﺎﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ،A1×30>100ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ A1ﺃﺯﺭﻕ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ،CellSum(B1:B30) ≤A1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ A1ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ،A1
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Formatﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SETFORM • ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ FORMATﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ 3ﻭ 4ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-13ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ. • ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ "."Format → .7ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﹼﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ 3ﺍﻟﻰ .6 .8ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟـ ،V1ﻭ V2ﻭ .Value • ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ،ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) ≠ 4(Cﺃﻭ ) = 3(Cﻟـ " ،"Expreﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ) 2(ERRORﺃﻭ )3(BLANK ﻟـ"."Value ) ... 2(ERRORﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ " "ERRORﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ. ...
) ... 2(ERRORﺗﺪﺧﻞ " "ERRORﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .A1=ERRORﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ " "ERRORﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ) A1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺎ(. ) ... 3(BLANKﻳﺪﺧﻞ " "BLANKﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ .ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ) ... 4(Andﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ " "Andﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ. ... 5(Or) -ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ " "Orﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ.
uﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .B3:C4 .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)5(CONDITﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ. • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ 1ﺃﻭﻻ ،ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻫﻨﺎ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " (Expression) "Expreﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) <.6(g)1(C • ﺃﻭﻻ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ " "Cell < Valueﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .Expre .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Valueﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ awﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .0 .5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Formatﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).
.5ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ( ،ﻭ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ.y- ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ. uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ. • ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ. .
ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ Frequency Mark Type ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ) 1(1ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ) ﺍﻭ ( ,ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ .1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)2(CALC)6(SET • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ. • ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
kﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ GRPHﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ /ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .CALCﻭ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺷﺮﻳﻄﻴﺎﹰ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-3ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ. ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ: ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ: Pie Category ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Categoryﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ StatGraphﺍﳌﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ: ).6(g)1(GRAPH)6(SET • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ " "Categoryﻭ "Dataﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ A1:A5ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻟـ " "Categoryﻭ B1:B5 ﻣﺒﲔ ﻟـ "."Data .4ﺍﺳﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Graph Typeﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(Pie .5ﺍﺳﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Color Linkﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(Cat .6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ. .7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).
.6ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Spreadsheet ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ. kﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ. ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (θ ،r ،Z ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
uﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ .A1:A10 .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)3(STORE)2(LIST • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ .ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Cell Rangeﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1 .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "]."List[1~26 .4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ،ﻭﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ. uﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ eActivity ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ eActivityﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ .eActivityﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ "ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ". ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﹼﻢ ،ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎ،ﺍﻟﺦ. .
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ .eActivity ﹼ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ...............ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ،ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ. ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ...ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ .ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Run-Matrixﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ............ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ. ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ..
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ )ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ( ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. • ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ. • } ... *{FILEﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • } ... {SAVEﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.ﹰ • } ... {SAVE • ASﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ. • } ... {OPTﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .11-13 • } ...
• } ... {COLORﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ COLORﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • } ... {MARKERﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10-10 • } ... {CHARﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10-11 • } ... {MEMOﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ MEMOﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • } ... {INSERTﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ. • } ... {DELETEﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ. • } ... {Catalogﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. • } ... {VIEWﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 8ﺍﺣﺮﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ • ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. 9ﺍﻟﻰ Z, {,}, ’, ~, 0ﺍﻟﻰ A uﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(OPENﺃﻭ .*w * ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺑﻚ. uﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).3(DELETE • ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ "?.
.4ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ .eActivityﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ) "eActivityﺻﻔﺤﺔ (10-4ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ.
• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ " "CALCﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ F3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CALCﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. • ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {INSERTﺛﻢ } {TEXTﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ eActivity .1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ " "CALCﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .F3ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ 3ﺍﻟﻰ "."CALC • ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ " "TEXTﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ F3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )3(CALC ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {'MAT/VCTﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ eActivityﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Run-Matrixﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-42ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ eActivityﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
uﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ } {INSERTﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ } {STOPﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. kﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺺ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺪﻳﺪ. • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. uﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .1ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻪ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)5(COLOR)1(MARKER .
uﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .1ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)5(COLOR)2(CHAR .3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ،ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ ،ﺃﺻﻔﺮ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ. ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ. • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ .ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﹼ .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ.
uﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ .1ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ. .2ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)1(INSERTﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)1(INSERT • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ. • ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌ ﹼﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ .1ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)4(VIEWﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)4(VIEW • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )3(DETAIL ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ .
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺓ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .eActivity ﻋﺮﺽ × ﻃﻮﻝ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺣﺠﻢ (a) 384 × 216 ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-39ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ .ﺍﻟـ 48 ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ eActivityﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ. (b) 384 × 192 ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
uﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. .2ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)3(INSERT)4(PICTUREﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).5(INSERT)4(PICTURE • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ g3pﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺪ PICTﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ .ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ.
uﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!f(FORMAT • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ. .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ. ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ: ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ: .1ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ .
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ) Run-Matrixﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Run-Matrixﻣﻦ .eActivityﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(.
uﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ .1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(STRIP • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10-17 .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. • ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ") "Graphﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ .(Graph .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
.8ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ. 1 2 )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝx – 1 : 2 = (Y .9ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(DRAW • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. .10ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ،eActivityﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) (.!a • ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 8ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ. • } ...{JUMPﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ JUMPﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )) (1(TOPﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )) (2(BOTTOMﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )) ،(3(PageUpﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )).(4(PageDown • } ... {DEL-LINEﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ. • } ... {INSERTﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ. • } ... {MATHﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ) MATHﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-17 • } ...
uﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ eActivityﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) (.!a ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ. ( !aﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ eActivityﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ uﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .w ( .!,ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ uﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺗﻪ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).
kﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ. ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-CG10/fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU/fx-CG50/fx-CG50 AUﹼﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟـ " ."g3eﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-CG10/ fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU/fx-CG50/fx-CG50 AUﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ " "g3eﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ eActivity ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳌﻠﻒ eActivityﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻫﻮ 29,000ﺑﺎﻳﺖ *.ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ eActivity ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. * ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﻭ ﻟﻌﻠﻪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 29,000ﺑﺎﻳﺖ. uﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ eActivity ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(FILE)4(CAPACITY ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،eActivityﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،(g3pﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﹰ. ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ "ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" ،ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ .
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ( • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ،ﺳﻴﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ: .(AAAABBBBCC.txt>AAAABB~1.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ" ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (13-12ﻭ "ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ /ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ — ) A = nﺇﻟﻰ ،Zﻭ MAT n (Ans ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻧﻌﻢ ) A = nﺇﻟﻰ ،Zﻭ VCT n (Ans ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻧﻌﻢ @PICTPLT ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ — PICTPLOT ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻌﻢ PROGRAM ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ — ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﻌﻢ ) 1 = nﺇﻟﻰ LISTFILE n (6 MAT_VCT RECURSION S-SHEET _SETTING ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ — ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻋ
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .g3a, .g3l :.g3aﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ :.g3lﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ .g3p ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .g3b ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻘﻠﺒﺔ .bmp ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ .txt ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .csv ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSV ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ * 1ﻳﻈﻬﺮ " "No Dataﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. kﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ .
uﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(FOLDER) 2(RENFLDRﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ. • ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ" ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ kﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﹼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 5(DETAILﻭ eﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3pﺍﻭ ،g3bﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SELECTﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ) ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ .ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SELECTﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻴﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ،ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ. → )1(SELECT ← • ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ .ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ.
kﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ uﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(COPY • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ " "ROOTﻫﻮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ROOTﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ.
uﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ. • ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،g1m :ﻭ ،g2mﻭ ،g3mﻭ ،g1rﻭ .g2rﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻷﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ".
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ،.g1mﻭ ،.g2mﻭ ،.g3mﻭ ،.g1rﺃﻭ .g2rﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ. kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ uﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ .1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. .2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ. • ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (11-7 .
kﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ uﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )4(BACKUP .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )1(SAVE • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ. • ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Memory Fullﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻹﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ.
uﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Memoryﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )4(BACKUP • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(LOAD • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﺃﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﺪ 1 .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ *.w • ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ.
kﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﺰﺃﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ,ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ. • ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺇﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ. .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • )} ... 1(DISPLAYﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ{ • )} ... 2(PWRPropﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ{ • )} ... 3(LANGUAGEﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{ • )} ... 4(VERSIONﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ{ • )} ... 5(RESETﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{ • )} ... 6(g)1(BattSetﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ{ • )} ... 6(g)2(UserNameﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ{ • )} ...
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(PWRPropﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. • ) 10} ... 1(10Minﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ{ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ( • ) 60} ... 2(60Minﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ{ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ. uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(PWRPropﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. .
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ LANGUAGEﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ. uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ .1ﻓﻲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(LANGUAGEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﺃﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(SELECT .3ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ. uﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ VERSIONﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. uﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ .1ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(VERSIONﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ. .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ( ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3ﺇ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ. kﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ .
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)2(ALLﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ,ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
kﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻳﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ. ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ. ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ /ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﹼ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ .
uﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)2(UserNameﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(DELETE • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ "."Password .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w • ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ. .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ. kﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﹼ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ .Linkﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. • }} ... {TRANSMITﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{ • }} ... {RECVﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{ • }} ... {EXAMﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ{ • }} ... {CABLEﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ{ • }} ...
.3ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ. .4ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺳﻞ. .5ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. kﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇ ﹼ ﻣﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ g3pﺃﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ bmpﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ).!h(CAPTURE ﺗﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ) ... 6(CAPTURE)1(Memoryﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ .g3p ) ... 6(CAPTURE)2(BMPﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ .bmp ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
.1ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ USBﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ .ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎﹰ،ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(USB Flash • ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Preparing USBﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ. .4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Windowsﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ .Windowsﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟـ Windows Explorerﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. :Windows 7ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ :Windows 8.
kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. uﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USB ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ @MainMemﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ROOT ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﹼﺪ @MainMem ROOT ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ DYNA MEM EQUATION FINANCIAL STAT SYSTEM TABLE Y=DATA ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ @MainMem DYNA MEM.g3m EQUATION.g3m FINANCE.g3m STAT.g3m SYSTEM.g3m TABLE.g3m Y=DATA.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMemﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﻣﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ " "SAVE-Fﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﹼ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Memory ERRORﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USBﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ) (.g3a/.g3Iﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMemﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ .
uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ) .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 8ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ"(. .2ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻭ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. .3ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ،@MainMem\PROGRAMﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ Windowsﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﺓ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ TextEditﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ Mac .OS .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
kﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USB • ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. :Windowsﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻓﻲﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ ."USBﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ". :Mac OSﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻼﺕ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.2ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ kﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺁﻟﺘﲔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ *SB-62ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ. * ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ. uﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ .1ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ. .2ﺃﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ. .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻛـ .3PIN ) (1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Link ) (2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،4(CABLEﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ. ) (3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(RECVﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﳊﲔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(TRANSMITﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .6(TRANSMITﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ. • ) ... 1(Yesﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ • ) ... 6(Noﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .A ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ) 6(Noﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﻻ :ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ. kﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺣﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )fx-CG10/fx-CG20/ (fx-CG20 AU/fx-CG50/fx-CG50 AUﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ.
* 6ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ. * 7ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ. * 8ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑـ E-CON2/E-CON3ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. uﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )fx-CG10/fx-CG20/ .(fx-CG20 AU/fx-CG50/fx-CG50 AU • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .
.3ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ CASIOﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. kﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. http://edu.casio.com/support/projector/ uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. • ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ". .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .1ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ. kﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ] [F1ﺍﻟﻰ ] [F6ﺃﻭ ] ،[OPTNﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﹼ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ. • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ 6ﺃﻭ (Kﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ.
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ.
3(Draw) u ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ: ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ: ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ 1:Point ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ 2:Line Segment ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ 3:Infinite Line ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ 4:Ray ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ 5:Vector ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ 6:Circle ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻮﺱ 7:Arc ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )8:SemiCirc (Diam 3e(Draw Spec) u ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ: ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ: ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ 1:Triangle ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ 2:Isosc Triangle ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ 3:Rectangle ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ 4:Square ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ
5(Transform) u ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ: ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ: ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ 1:Reflection ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ 2:Translation ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ )3:Trans(Sel Vec ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ 4:Rotation ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ 5:Dilation ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ 180ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ 6:Symmetry 6(Animate) u ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ: ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ: ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻴﺌﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ 1:Add Animation ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﺸﻴﺌﲔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ 2:Replace Anima
K(Option)e(Properties) u ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ: ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ: ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ 1:to the front ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ 2:to the back ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ 3:All TEXT ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ 4:Fade I/O ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ (g3p 5:Store Picture kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ، ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ.
kﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ. ﹼ uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1(File) – 1:New : • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .2ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(Yes • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ. uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1(File) – 2:Open : • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
uﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1(File) – 2:Open : • ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ. .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(DELETE • ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ. .4ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J uﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) (g3pﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺖ ﻣﻠﻒ ،g3pﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g3pﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ. • ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-37 • ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ. uﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ g3pﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .
kﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ (g3pﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ).(g3p ﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ. uﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: )].K(Option)e(Properties) – 5:Store Picture w(Pict [1~20 .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .
kﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﹼ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-41 ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-1 ﻳﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-31 ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ )ﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ(.
.2ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﹼ • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ) .ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) ،([F3](Drawﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )([F3][g](Draw Spec • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )([F2](Edit • ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ) .
uﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ، ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 1:Point : .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ. • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺑـ "."䡺 → .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ. uﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 2:Line Segment : .
uﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 3:Infinite Line : .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ. uﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 4:Ray : .2ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .3ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
uﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 6:Circle : .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ .ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w ﺇﻣﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
uﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3(Draw) – 8:SemiCirc (Diam) : .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ. • ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ،ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ w ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ. .
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ. → • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،2ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ، ,ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ،ﻭ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ. ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﹼﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،2ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ،ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .3 uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3e(Draw Spec) – 5:Polygon : .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3e(Draw Spec) – 6:Regular n-gon : • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 3ﺍﻟﻰ 12ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﺍﻟﻰ 4ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-15 • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .2 uﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.3e(Draw Spec) – 7:Function f(x) : • ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. .
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ )ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ,ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻨﻪ. ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ. ﹼ uﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ .1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﺃﻭ Jﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ. ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ. .2ﹼ • ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ .
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ xﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 4:Select Figure : • ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ. uﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ .1ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ oﺍﻭ Jﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ. ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ. .2ﹼ • ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ .kﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ kﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ. → .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
kﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ،ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 2:Select All : .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !f(FORMATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ. .
.4ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J → uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-19ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻪ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!f (FORMAT • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻈﻬﺮﺓ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ. .
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 2:Perpendicular : • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ. → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ .
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﲔ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 4:Intersection : • ﻳﺨﻄﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﲔ. → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ :ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭ ﺧﻂ ,ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ،ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ،ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ. uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 6:Parallel : • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ. → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
uﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.4(Construct) – 8:Attached Angle : • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ. → • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ،"Select Display Positionﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ. → → → .3ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ. → → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭ ﺧﻂ ،ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ،ﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ. uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻪ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 2:Translation : • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ. → → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ. uﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻘﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.5(Transform) – 4:Rotation : • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "."Sel Rotation Center ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ. .3ﹼ .4ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .
.5ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻟـ 0.1 < | x | < 10ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. → → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ. • ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ2 : ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ-1 : ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ0.5 : uﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ 180ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ. .
kﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ. uﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ * ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: .2(Edit) – 1:Undo/Redo ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ. • ﻗﻢ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ) 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All :ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .v ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ • ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1 ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ،ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. ﺳﻴﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ. • ﹼ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ .4ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ .ﳊﺬﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ، ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Dﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 5:Delete : • ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ. uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.2(Edit) – 6:Clear All : • ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ. ﻫﺎﻡ! ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .
.3ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻭ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻫﺎﻡ! ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ .
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Axesﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ. ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ: ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ: ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )1(On ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )2(Off ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ )3(Scale .6ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ .
kﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ) (Xminﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ )(Xmax ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ) 1:2ﻣﺤﻮﺭ :x-ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ،(y-ﻟﻜﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ).(Ymid Ymid Xmin Xman uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ: ).!3 (V-WIN .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟـ ،Xminﻭ ،Xmaxﻭ .
.4ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻭ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ،ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )ﲢﺮﻳﻚ( ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. uﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .ﺍﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 3:Scroll : • ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .
uﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﳌﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ +ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 4:Zoom In : ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ -ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 5:Zoom Out : uﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ -ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.1e(View) – 6:Zoom to Fit : • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ).
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 31ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ. → .4ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ. • ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-30 → uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
kﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ،ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ. uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ .A .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ. .
.6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 14ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ. → .7ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ. uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ. .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ Jﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ: ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ/ﻃﻮﻝ،ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ،ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ،ﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ،ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ،ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ،ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ،ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ،ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ،ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﲤﺎﺱ ،ﻭ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ.
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ،ﻭ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ﹼ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ /ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ .
ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﲔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ.
.4ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. • ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ،ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﻬﺎ. ﺍﳌﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ .5ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻣﺮﺗﲔ. uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ: ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ABCDﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ،Aﻭ ،Dﻭ Bﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،Aﻭ ،Dﻭ C .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ. .2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،Aﻭ ،Dﻭ .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻨﺠﻤﲔ )``( ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ .ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ. kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ .1ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ .2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ACﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ .BC .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ. • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ) ∠ACBﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ. .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-47 • ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ )ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-47ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
kﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑـ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ" ﻧﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﹼﺎ ﻧﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻧﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ. uﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ. ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ uﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-45ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ "ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-41 uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ] [Unlockﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
kﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ. ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ :ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ/ﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻭﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ،ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ،ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ، ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ،ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ،ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ. uﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ: ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ. .
.5ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ vﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ، ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-30 → ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )!j(PASTE ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 14ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ. • ﳊﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .o .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w • ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﻣﺮﺗﲔ. .5ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﹼ kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.K(Option) – 2:Expression : • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ "= "EXPRﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ. • ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ .2ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ. • ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )@( ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،@1 :ﻭ ،@2 ﺇﻟﺦ .ﻣﻨﺬ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ) ،DCB (@1ﻭ ) ACD (@2ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻜﺎﻝ، ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ABCﻭﻣﺜﻠﺚ ’ A’B’Cﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻸ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ " .
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .+ .5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ fﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ewﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "’ "@2 DA’B’Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ،ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ") "@2ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟـ ’ (DA’B’Cﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ. .6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ’DABC+DA’B’C ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. • ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻫﻮ " ."Fix2ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-12 • ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ: ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.6ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ/ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ ،ﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ،ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ،ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ /ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ. kﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ: ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﹼ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ! • ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ" ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. uﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 90ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ .jaw • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻭ 90 DEﺩﺭﺟﺔ، ﻭﻳﻘﻔﻠﻬﺎ. .7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Joﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .8ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ DEﻭ ،DCﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J .9ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dwﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ،ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w w → .10ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ • ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ .w . • ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ DEﻭ DCﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ. .
.14ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 3:Trace : • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) Dﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ (13ﻛـ "ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ". .15ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 5:Go (once) : • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ABﻫﻲ ﺍﺮﺝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Cﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: .
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ: ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ: ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﲤﺮ ﹼ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ AB .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ " "Stepsﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).(1 STEPS → .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ 2ﺍﻟﻰ 100ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ AB .
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ: ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ: ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ E .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ " ،"Eﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﲢﺖ "."Animations .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(DELETE • ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﻭﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ") "Eﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻴﻢ ""t0ﻭ " "t1ﲢﺘﻪ( ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲢﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”“Animations ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )1 (DELETE ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ D .
kﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ،ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ,،ﻗﻮﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .20ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ" ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ،ﺍﻟﺦ. ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ :ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ) ،(x،yﻭﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ/ﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺬﺍﺭ ،ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ،ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ،ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) ،(x،yﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [Add Tableﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ. • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ CDﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻲ "."Length .7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ. .8ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﳉﻌﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ. .9ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ،CDﻭ ،DEﻭ CEﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ. .10ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ" ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.6(Animate) – 8:Display Table : uﳊﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ. .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(STORE)1(LIST • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 26ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ :fx-CG50 AU/fx-CG20 AUﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ .Picture Plot ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ(. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺴﻘﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ) (Tﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ) (X, Yﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ T-Xﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ .T-Yﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ T-X )ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ،X-Yﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ SKETCHﻭ G-SOLVEﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺓ kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ • } ... {OPENﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ .g3p/g3b • } ... {DELETEﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ .g3p/g3b • } ... {SEARCHﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻠﻒ .g3p/g3b • } ... {DETAILﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(11-6 kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ • } ... {FILEﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • } ... {OPENﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. • } ... {SAVEﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ(. • } ...
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ • } ... {AXTRNSﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛـ } {AXTRNSﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ". • } ... {EDITﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ. • } ... {DEL • BTMﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ. • } ... {DEL-ALLﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ. • } ... {SETﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )) (Tﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-15 • } ... {JUMPﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • }} ... {BOTTOM}/{TOPﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ{}/ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ{ • } ...
.2ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﲟﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﻣﻠﻒ ... g3pﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﻣﻠﻒ ... g3bﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ CASIOﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ .http://edu.casio.com kﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) g3pﺃﻭ .
uﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ • ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ :ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K1(FILE)3(SAVE • AS • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ROOTﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ. ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ • ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﹼ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SAVE • AS .4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ. • ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) ،K3(EDITﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-9 • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ 50ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .g3pﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ،g3bﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. .5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ).
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻄﻂ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).K6(g)3(EDIT • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K2(Plot)K3(EDITﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻨﻪ. • ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﹼﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ T-ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (15-14 ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ. .
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) ،K6(g)4(DELETEﻭ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ. ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(Noﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻨﻪ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-14 kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) Y=f(xﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) Y=f(xﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ* 1ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ. • ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .3(X2ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ 2 ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ*. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 5(COPYﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ) Y=f(xﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15-10 .4ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).
uﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ,ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANS ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANSﻣﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(15-14ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !6(G⇔Tﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،AXTRANSﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ. )!6(G⇔T )!6(G⇔T )!6(G⇔T kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ )ﺑﻬﺖ (I/Oﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ) 0%ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ) 100%ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ( ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻔﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟـ 100%ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ. kﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻄﻄﺎﺕ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ( ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ) ،(X, Yﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ، ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻄﻂ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ) (Tﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ T-Xﺍﻭ .(AXTRANS) T-Y uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻄﻂ .
uﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ X-ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Y-ﻟﻠﺨﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(DEL • BTMﻣﺮﺓ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻄﻂ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ X-ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Y-ﻷﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(DEL • BTMﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(DEL • BTMﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )(T .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).5(SET .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ،1.5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .bwb.fw .3ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) wﺃﻭ .(J • ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻄﻂ ،ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Tﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ. –1.0 × 1010 < Start < 1.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،AXTRANSﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Gridﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Offﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Labelﺗﻜﻮﻥ " ."Onﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟـ" ،"Axesﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ " "Onﺃﻭ " ."Scaleﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Offﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ " "Onﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. • ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،AXTRANSﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ T-ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ "Axtransﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
) (3ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ،ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )) (2ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ .ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(Cutoutﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻭ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ .ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﹼ → .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J uﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ AXTRANSﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .
.5ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ !1ﺍﻟﻰ !5ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ. • )" ... !1(TRACEﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-54 • )" ... !2(ZOOMﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-8 • )" ... !3(V-WINﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )) "(View Windowﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-5 • )" ... !4(SKETCHﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ،ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻭ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻣﺨﻄﻂ(" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-52 • )" ...
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،3D Graphﹸﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﹸﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻟﻸﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. • ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ • ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ • ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ • ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ • ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ) Labelﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ/ﺍﻔﻴﺔ( • }} ... {Off}/{Onﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ{}/ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﻔﻴﺔ{ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ Labelﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ., Off On .1ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 3D Graph ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ )(x2 + y2 + z2 = 22 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :1 .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(DRAWﺃﻭ .w • ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ. • ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3Dﺍﺿﻐﻂ .Aﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،3D ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ) !6(G⇔Tﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :2 ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D Z = X2 + Y2 − 3 .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .
.2ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ .3D Graph kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .3D Graph .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ Xgridﻭ Ygridﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ. • ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ Xgridﻭ Ygridﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻮﺿﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ. ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﹰ • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Sminﻭ Smaxﻭ Sgridﻭ Tminﻭ Tmaxﻭ Tgridﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ.
.3ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D • } ... {SELECTﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ. • } ... {DELETEﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ. • } ... {TYPEﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) 3Dﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(16-8 • } ... {3D-GMEMﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(16-7 • } ... {DRAWﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " "Line Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ .2 .5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ " "Area Colorﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w .6ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ .2 .7ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J • ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ .
uﳊﻔﻆ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 3Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(3D-GMEM)1(STORE .2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) 3Dﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ (20ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﺿﻐﻂ ،bwﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. … Lineﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ. … Planeﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ. … Sphereﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ. … Cylinderﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ. ... Coneﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ. ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ) ... 1(Templateﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ. )= ... 2(Zﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ =.Z ) ... 3(Paramﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ. ) ...
) ... 3(P&Vﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ. ) ... 4(POINTSﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ. • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Setting • a=0 :EXPRESSﺃﻭ b=0ﺃﻭ c=0 • :VECTORﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ vﻫﻲ 0 • :P&Vﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻫﻲ 0 • :POINTSﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ P1ﻭ P2ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ uﳕﻮﺫﺝ Plane ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ. ) ...
) ... 3(POINTSﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Setting • a=0 :EXPRESSﺃﻭ b=0ﺃﻭ c=0 • :VECTOR • ﻛﻼ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ uﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ،vﺃﻭ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ uﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ vﻫﻲ .0 • ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ uﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ vﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ. • :POINTS • ﻟﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ. • ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
uﳕﻮﺫﺝ Cylinder ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ. • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Setting • 0 :Radiusﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ • ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ uﳕﻮﺫﺝ Cone ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
uﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ =Z uﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ • ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ .
.5ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D kﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ. ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D kﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3D ﹰ ﹰ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﲔ. .
.4ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ .ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ Z=) .ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. .5ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!1(TRACE kﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ.
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ. ) … !4(SKETCH)1(Clsﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺏ. ) … 2(Plotﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ. ) … 3(Textﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ. .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ) ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻪ. .5ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
) … 2(Yﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ y-ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ. ) … 3(Zﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ z-ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ. • ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ )ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ .Area Color • ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ.
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ fx-CG50 AUﻭ (fx-CG20 AU ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ. • ﺧﻂ-ﺧﻂ ...ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ • ﺧﻂ-ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ...ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ • ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ-ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ...ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻂ-ﺧﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ Lineﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﹼ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ P1=0,0,0 :1 P2=1,1,1 ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ P1=1,1,0 :2 P2=2,2,2 .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(DRAWﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ fx-CG50 AUﻭ (fx-CG20 AU ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .3D ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﹼ • ﺧﻂ-ﺧﻂ ...ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ/ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ/ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﻥ/ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻓﺎﻥ/ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻂ • ﺧﻂ-ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ...ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ/ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﹰﺎ/ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﻥ/ﺧﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ • ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ-ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ...
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ .1ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ • ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: Syntax ERROR • ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ • ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ. Ma ERROR • ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. • ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ )ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ ،ﺍﻟﺦ(. ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: Non-Real ERROR ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Realﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﹰ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ. Can’t Simplify ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) 'Simpﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(2-26ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻟـ 3ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ .
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: Invalid List, Matrix or Vector ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ. Dimension ERROR ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: Range ERROR ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ. No Variable ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: Condition ERROR ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(GRAPH)4(SELECT Data in use • ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ ") "Resid Listﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ( ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺛﻘﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺏ ".
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: Range ERROR ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺼﻖ ،ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ،ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ. Circular ERROR ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﻣﺜﻞ " "= A1ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ (A1 ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: Memory ERROR ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ. • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ. • ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺰﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ. Folder has over 300 files.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: File System ERROR ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻫﺎﻡ!" ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(12-4 ﹼ ﻫﺎﻡ! ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ .
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: Complex Number in Data ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ. )ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﹼ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ. ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻟـ .CFX-9850G ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﹼ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: First select a segment. ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. First select a line and point. ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ. First select 2 points or a segment. ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: First configure animation settings. • ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲢﺮﻙ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ. • ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. Cannot Add Animation • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺦ.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 3D Graph ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: INTSECT requires multiple lines or planes. ﻟﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ Lineﺃﻭ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ Planeﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ Lineﺃﻭ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ Planeﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 3Dﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. RELATION requires multiple lines or planes.
• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ: ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ: No Data ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. No File ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻦ 1 ﺍﻟﻰ (20ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ.
.2ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ sinx cosx tanx ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )|x| < 9 × (109)° (DEG )|x| < 5 × 107π rad (RAD )|x| < 1 × 1010 grad (GRA sin–1x cos–1x |x| < 1 tan–1x |x| < 1 × 10100 sinhx coshx |x| < 230.
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ”’ ° |a|, b, c < 1 × 10100 0 < b, c ⎯← ”’ ° |x| < 1 × 10100 ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻲ: |x| < 1 × 107 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ*. :x > 0 –1 × 10 100 )^(xy < ylogx < 100 y>0:x=0 m :x<0 –––– y = n, 2n+1 " " )ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ (m, n ﻟﻜﻦ؛ 100 –1 × 10 < y log |x| < 100 • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﻀﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) (Examination Modeﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ؛ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ. ﻓﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
uﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 15ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ • ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 60ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ. • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ a-ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ .ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
uﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ) (1ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ USBﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. .2ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ") "Select Connection Modeﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. .3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. .4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. .5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،Aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(RECV .4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،2*Bﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Linkﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).3(EXAM)1(UNLOCK)1(Yes ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ Bﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .A • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ A .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،Bﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Linkﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(TRANSMIT)1(MAIN)1(SELECT .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "."SETUP .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).
E-CON4 Application (English)
Important! • All explanations in this section assume that you are fully familiar with all calculator and Data Logger (CMA CLAB* or CASIO EA-200) precautions, terminology, and operational procedures. CLAB firmware must be version 2.10 or higher. Be sure to check the firmware version of your CLAB before using it. * For information about CMA and the CLAB Data Logger, visit http://cma-science.nl/.
ε-1 E-CON4 Mode Overview 1. E-CON4 Mode Overview The first time you enter the E-CON4 mode, a screen will appear for selecting a Data Logger. Data Logger Selection Screen Press 1(CLAB) or 2(EA-200) to select the Data Logger you want to use. Selecting a Data Logger will cause the sampling screen (Time-based Sampling screen) to appear. Use the sampling screen to start sampling with the Data Logger and to view a graph of samples.
ε-2 E-CON4 Mode Overview k E-CON4 Specific Setup Items The items described below are E-CON4 setup items that displayed only when the !m(SET UP) operation is performed in the E-CON4 mode. Indicates the initial default setting of each item. u Data Logger • {CLAB}/{EA-200} ... {CLAB Data Logger}/{EA-200 Data Logger} u Graph Func • {On}/{Off} ... {show graph source data name}/{hide graph source data name} u Coord • {On}/{Off} ...
ε-3 Sampling Screen 2. Sampling Screen k Changing the Sampling Screen On any sampling screen, press 5(MODE) to display the sampling mode selection screen. CLAB EA-200 Use keys b through e to select the sampling mode that matches the type of sampling you want to perform. k Time-based Sampling Screen CLAB EA-200 • CLAB has three channels named CH1, CH2, and CH3. • EA-200 has four channels named CH1, CH2, CH3, and SONIC.
ε-4 Sampling Screen k Period Sampling Screen CLAB EA-200 • With CLAB, only CH1 can be used. • EA-200 has two channels (CH1 and SONIC). However, only one of these can be used. k Manual Sampling Screen (CLAB Only) CLAB • There are three channels named CH1, CH2, and CH3. k Mic & Speaker Mode Screen (EA-200 Only) On the sampling mode selection screen, pressing e(Mic & Speaker Mode) displays the dialog box shown below. Select Microphone or Speaker.
ε-5 Sampling Screen “Sound wave” records the following two dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical axis). “FFT” records the following two dimensions: frequency (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical axis). • Selecting “Sound wave” here will display the Mic & Speaker Mode screen. • Selecting “Sound wave & FFT” or “FFT only” will display the dialog box shown below.
ε-6 Sampling Screen u Selecting Speaker This displays the dialog box shown below. • Selecting “Sample Data” here will display the Mic & Speaker Mode screen. • After selecting “y=f(x)”, perform the steps below. From the EA-200, output the sound of the waveform indicated by the function input on the calculator, and draw a graph of the function on the calculator unit screen. 1. Use the data communication cable (SB-62) to connect the communication port of the calculator with the MASTER port of the EA-200. 2.
ε-7 Sampling Screen 6. Press 6(DRAW) to draw the graph. • Drawing the graph causes a vertical cursor to appear on the display, as shown on the screenshot below. Use this graph to specify the range of the sound output from the speaker. 7. Use the d and e keys to move the vertical cursor of the output range start point and then press w to register the start point. 8. Use the d and e keys to move the vertical cursor of the output range end point and then press w to register the end point.
ε-8 Sampling Screen 13. Depending on what you want to do, perform one of the operations below. To change the output frequency and try again: Press 1(Yes) to return to the Output Frequency dialog box. Next, perform the operation starting from step 9, above. To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again: Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 6, above. Next, perform the operation starting from step 7, above.
ε-9 Auto Sensor Detection (CLAB Only) 3. Auto Sensor Detection (CLAB Only) When using a CLAB Data Logger, sensors connected to each channel are detected automatically. This means that you can connect a sensor and immediately start sampling. 1. On the setup screen, select “CLAB” for the “Data Logger” setting. 2. Connect the CLAB Data Logger to the calculator. 3. Connect a sensor to each of the CLAB channels you want to use. • Detection of a sensor will cause a screen like the one below to appear.
ε-10 Selecting a Sensor 4. Selecting a Sensor On the sampling screen, press 1(SENSOR) to display the sensor selection screen. k Assigning a Sensor to a Channel 1. On the sampling screen, use f and c to select the channel to which you want to assign the sensor. 2. Press 1(SENSOR). • This displays the sensor selection screen like the one shown below. The appearance of the sensor selection screen depends on the Data Logger type and the selected channel. 3. Press one of the function keys below.
ε-11 Selecting a Sensor • Pressing a function key displays a dialog box like the one shown below. This shows the sensors that can be assigned to the selected channel. 4. Use f and c to select the sensor you want to assign and then press w. • This returns to the screen in step 1 of this procedure with the name of the sensor you assigned displayed. At this time there will be a lock ( ) icon to the right of the sensor name. This icon indicates the sensor you assigned with the operation above.
ε-12 Configuring the Sampling Setup 5. Configuring the Sampling Setup You can configure detailed settings to control individual sampling parameters and to configure the Data Logger for a specific application. Use the Sampling Config screen to configure settings. There are two configuration methods, described below. Method 1 ... With this method, you configure settings for the sampling interval (Interval) and number of samples (Samples). Method 2 ...
ε-13 Configuring the Sampling Setup 5. Press c to move the highlighting to “Samples”. • When the sampling mode is “Periodic Sampling” and a CMA or Vernier Photogate Pulley is assigned to the channel, “Distance” will be displayed in place of “Samples”. For information about “Distance”, see “To configure the Distance setting” below. 6. Press e. • This displays a dialog box for specifying the number of samples. 7. Input the number of samples and then press w. 8. Press c to move the highlighting to “Warm-up”.
ε-14 Configuring the Sampling Setup k Using Method 2 to Configure Settings 1. On the sampling screen, press 2(CONFIG). • This displays the Sampling Config screen. 2. Press 5(Method2). • This will cause the highlighting to move to “Sample/sec”. 3. Press e. • This displays a dialog box for specifying the number of samples per second. 4. Input the number of samples and then press w. 5. Press c to move the highlighting to “Total Time”. 6. Press e.
ε-15 Configuring the Sampling Setup u Input Ranges Method 1 Interval (sec): 0.0005 to 299 sec (0.02 to 299 sec for the Motion sensor. 0.0025 to 299 sec for the CLAB built-in 3-axis accelerometer.) Interval (min): 5 to 240 min (With some sensors, a setting of five minutes or greater is not supported.) Samples: 10 to 10001 Method 2 Sample/sec: 1 to 2000 (1 to 50 sec for the CMA Motion sensor. 1 to 400 for the CLAB built-in 3-axis accelerometer.
ε-16 Configuring the Sampling Setup • To configure Trigger Setup settings 1. While the Sampling Config screen is on the display, press 6(Trigger). • This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted. • The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode. The nearby screen shows the function menu when “Time-based Sampling” is selected as the sample sampling mode. 2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
ε-17 Configuring the Sampling Setup • To specify the countdown start time 1. Move the highlighting to “Timer”. 2. Press 1(Time) to display a dialog box for specifying the countdown start time. 3. Input a value in seconds from 1 to 10. 4. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Sampling Config screen. • To specify microphone sensitivity 1. Move the highlighting to “Sense” and then press one of the function keys described below.
ε-18 Configuring the Sampling Setup • To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and trigger end edge settings Perform the following steps when “Period Sampling” is specified as the sampling mode. 1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”. 2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is value that data needs to attain before sampling starts. 3. Input the value you want. 4. Move the highlighting to “Start to”. 5.
ε-19 Configuring the Sampling Setup • To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level 1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”. 2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is value that data needs to attain before sampling starts. 3. Input the value you want, and then press w. 4. Move the highlighting to “Level”. 5. Press one of the function keys described below. To select this type of level: Press this key: Below 1(Below) Above 2(Above) 6.
ε-20 Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero Adjustment 6. Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero Adjustment You can use the procedures in this section to perform auto sensor calibration and sensor zero adjustment. With auto calibration, you can configure applicable interpolation formula slope (Slope) and y-intercept (Intercept) values for a sensor based on two measured values. With zero adjustment, you can configure a custom probe y-intercept based on measured values.
ε-21 Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero Adjustment 1. On the sensor calibration screen, press 2(CALIB). • A screen like the one shown below will appear after the first sampling operation starts. First sampling operation Real-time display of sampled values 2. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds. • This registers the first sampled valued and displays it on the screen.
ε-22 Performing Auto Sensor Calibration and Zero Adjustment 2. When the sampled value that you want to zero adjust is displayed, press w. • This returns to the sensor calibration screen. • E-CON4 automatically sets a y-intercept value based on the measured value. Automatically calculated values are displayed on the sensor calibration screen. k Configuring Settings Manually 1. On the sensor calibration screen, use f and c to move the highlighting to the item whose setting you want to change. 2.
ε-23 Using a Custom Probe 7. Using a Custom Probe The sensors shown in the CASIO, Vernier, and CMA sensor lists under “4. Selecting a Sensor” are E-CON4 mode standard sensors. If you want to sample with a sensor not included in a list, you must configure it as a custom probe. k Registering a Custom Probe 1. On the sensor selection screen, press 4(CUSTOM). • This displays the custom probe list screen. • If there is no registered custom probe, the message “No Custom Probe” appears on the display. 2.
ε-24 Using a Custom Probe 7. After configuring the required settings, press 6(SAVE) or w. • This displays the dialog box shown below. 8. Input the custom probe registration number (1 to 99) and then press w. • This registers the custom probe and returns to the custom probe list screen. k Assigning a Custom Probe to a Channel 1. On the sampling screen, use f and c to select the channel to which you want to assign the custom probe. 2. Press 1(SENSOR) to display the sensor selection screen. 3.
ε-25 Using Setup Memory 8. Using Setup Memory Data logger setup data (Data Logger settings, sampling mode, assigned sensor, sampling setup) is stored at the time it is created in a memory area called the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data. You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want. k Saving a Setup 1.
ε-26 Using Setup Memory 3. Press K(Setup Preview) (or e). • This displays the preview dialog box. 4. To close the preview dialog box, press J. • To recall a setup and use it for sampling Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
ε-27 Using Setup Memory 4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the setup. • To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No). • To recall setup data Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area. After recalling setup data, you can edit it as required. This capability comes in handy when you need to perform a setup that is slightly different from one you have stored in memory. 1.
ε-28 Starting a Sampling Operation 9. Starting a Sampling Operation This section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON4 mode to start a Data Logger sampling operation. k Before getting started... Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4.
ε-29 Starting a Sampling Operation 3. Press w to start sampling. • The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete depend on setup details (sampling mode, trigger setup, etc.). For details, see “Operations during a sampling operation” below. • Operations during a sampling operation Sending a sample start command from the calculator to a Data Logger causes the following sequence to be performed.
Period Sampling Mic & Speaker Mode Fast Sampling Time-based Sampling Mode 1. Data Logger Setup Starts Sampling 2. Start Standby Pressing 1 advances to “4. Graphing”. Pressing w there returns to “3. Sampling”. • Time-based Sampling: Interval of 5min or greater • The screen shown below appears when CH1~3, SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger. 3. Sampling 1 w Sample values are stored as List data only. The following three graph types can be produced when Photogate -Pulley is being used. 1.
ε-31 Starting a Sampling Operation k Manual Sampling 1. On the Manual Sampling screen, press 6(START). • This displays a sampling start confirmation screen. 2. Press w. • This displays the screen shown below. 3. Press w to start sampling. • This will display a screen like the one shown below. 4. When you want to acquire data, press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting the horizontal axis for the sample values. 5. Input a horizontal axis value and then press w.
ε-32 Starting a Sampling Operation • You can sample data up to 100 times. 7. To exit the sampling operation, press J. • This displays an exit confirmation dialog box. 8. Press 1(Yes). • This displays a screen like the one shown below. • Specify the list where you want to store the data. Input ... Specify the list where you want to store the horizontal axis data. CH1, CH2, CH3 ... Specify lists where you want to store the sample data of each channel. 9. After specifying the lists, press w.
ε-33 Using Sample Data Memory 10. Using Sample Data Memory Performing a Data Logger sampling operation from the E-CON4 mode causes sampled results to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON4 memory. Separate data is saved for each channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s “current data”. Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is replaced by the newly sampled data.
ε-34 Using Sample Data Memory 4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number. 5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input. The sample data file you save is indicated on the display using the format: :.
ε-35 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 11. Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data. Note • Sampled data cannot be graphed in the cases described below.
ε-36 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis mode to drawing a graph. Note • Step 4 through step 7 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings. • If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top line of the Graph Mode screen.
ε-37 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 3. Press 2(DATA). • This displays the Sampling Data List screen. 4. Specify the sampled data for graphing. a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASSIGN) or w. • This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file you selected. Sample data file name Graph on/off indicator Name of sensor used for sampling Graph Mode Screen b.
ε-38 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want. To specify this graph style: Press this key: Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers 1( ) Line graph with square ( 䡵 ) data markers 2( ) Line graph with X (×) data markers 3( ) Scatter graph with 3×3-dot data markers 4( ) Scatter graph with 5×5-dot data markers 5( ) Scatter graph with X (×) data markers 6( ) c.
ε-39 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 12. Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after drawing a graph. You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page ε-36.
ε-40 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations Key Operation Description K5(Y=fx) Displays the graph relation list, which lets you select a Y=f(x) graph to overlay on the sampled result graph. See “Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph” on page ε-46. K6(SPEAKER) Starts an operation for outputting a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from the speaker (EA-200 only). See “Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker” on page ε-48.
ε-41 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range whose periodic frequency you want to obtain. • This causes the period and periodic frequency value at the start point you selected in step 2 to appear along the bottom of the screen. 4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha memory variables. • This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency] values.
ε-42 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Press w. • This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode. • The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode. To do this: Press this cursor key: Enlarge the graph image horizontally e Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d Enlarge the graph image vertically f Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c 4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
ε-43 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. After everything is the way you want, press w. • This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the graph screen. • For details about using list data, see Chapter 3 of this manual. Note • Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SELECT) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
ε-44 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations • To specify the CSV file delimiter symbol and decimal point Press K2(MEMORY)2(CSV)2(SET) to display the CSV format setting screen. Next, perform the procedure from step 3 under “Specifying the CSV File Delimiter Symbol and Decimal Point” (page 3-20). k Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function Fourier series expansion is effective for studying sounds by expressing them as functions.
ε-45 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w. • The graph relation list appears with the calculation result. 7. Pressing 6(DRAW) here graphs the function. • This lets you compare the expanded function graph and the original graph to see if they are the same. Note • When you press 6(DRAW) in step 7, the graph of the result of the Fourier series expansion may not align correctly with the original graph on which it is overlaid.
ε-46 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform quadratic regression, and then press w. • This displays the quadratic regression calculation result screen. 5. Press 6(DRAW). • This draws a quadratic regression graph and overlays it over the original graph. • To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph, press !4(SKETCH) and then 1(Cls).
ε-47 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 2. Press 1(ZOOM). • This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear, along with a magnifying glass cursor ( ) in the center of the screen. 4.
ε-48 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations • To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display 1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT). • This displays the EDIT menu. 2. Press 2(MOVE). • This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear. 4.
ε-49 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker, and then press w. • After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown below appears on the display. → 4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want. • The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%.
ε-50 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to configure. Function Key Description 1(Auto)* Automatically applies the following View Window parameters. Y-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size X-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size when 1 data item equals 1 dot; 1 data equals 1 dot in other cases 2(FULL) Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen.
ε-51 Calling E-CON4 Functions from an eActivity 13. Calling E-CON4 Functions from an eActivity You can call E-CON4 functions from an eActivity by including an “E-CON strip” in the eActivity file. The following describes each of the two available E-CON strips. • E-CON Top strip This strip calls the Time-based Sampling screen. This strip provides access to almost all executable functions, including detailed Data Logger setup and sampling execution; graphing and Graph Analysis Tools, etc.
Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: Casio Europe GmbH Casio-Platz 1 22848 Norderstedt, Germany www.casio-europe.
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan SA1709-B © 2017 CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.